Lenovo Server RS210 User Manual
Hardware Maintenance Manual  
ThinkServer RS210  
Machine Types: 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532,  
6533, and 6534  
Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in “Notices,” on page 221 and the  
Warranty and Support Information document on the ThinkServer Documentation DVD.  
Second Edition (January 2010)  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009.  
Portions © Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2007, 2009.  
LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and  
are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted  
rights to use, reproduction and disclosure.  
LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered  
pursuant a General Services Administration ″GSA″ contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions  
set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 1. About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Important Safety Information .  
Safety statements .  
Important information about replacing RoHS compliant FRUs .  
Turkish statement of compliance.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1  
. 2  
. 7  
. 8  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 2. General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Features and technologies .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 9  
. 11  
. 12  
. 12  
. 13  
Specifications .  
Software  
EasyStartup  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
EasyManage .  
Chapter 3. General Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Checkout procedure  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 15  
. 15  
. 16  
. 16  
. 18  
About the checkout procedure .  
Performing the checkout procedure  
Diagnosing a problem .  
Undocumented problems .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 4. Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Diagnostic tools .  
Event logs .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 19  
. 19  
. 20  
. 20  
. 21  
. 21  
. 21  
. 29  
. 30  
. 50  
. 50  
. 51  
. 52  
. 52  
. 54  
. 55  
. 56  
. 57  
. 58  
. 59  
. 61  
. 62  
. 63  
. 64  
. 65  
. 65  
. 65  
. 67  
. 67  
. 68  
. 69  
. 69  
. 69  
. 70  
.
.
Viewing event logs through the Setup utility  
Viewing event logs without restarting the server .  
Clearing the event logs  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
POST  
POST error codes  
System-event log  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Integrated management module error messages  
Troubleshooting tables.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
EasyStartup problems .  
DVD drive problems  
General problems  
Hard disk drive problems  
Hypervisor problems .  
Intermittent problems .  
.
.
.
.
.
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems  
Memory problems .  
Microprocessor problems .  
Monitor problems  
Optional-device problems  
Power problems .  
Serial-device problems.  
Software problems .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems  
Video problems .  
Error LEDs  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Power-supply LEDs  
System pulse LEDs .  
Diagnostic programs and messages  
Running the diagnostic programs .  
Diagnostic text messages .  
Viewing the test log  
Diagnostic messages  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2007, 2009.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
Recovering the server firmware  
Automated boot recovery (ABR) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 100  
. 102  
. 102  
. 102  
. 102  
. 103  
. 104  
Three boot failure .  
Solving power problems.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Solving Ethernet controller problems  
Solving undetermined problems .  
Problem determination tips.  
.
.
.
.
Chapter 5. Locating Server Controls and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Front view  
Rear view  
System-board internal connectors.  
System-board external connectors  
System-board optional-device connectors .  
System-board switches and jumpers .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 105  
. 106  
. 107  
. 108  
. 109  
. 111  
. 112  
. 113  
. 113  
. 113  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
System-board LEDs  
Server power features  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Turning on the server.  
Turning off the server  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Guidelines for trained service technicians .  
Inspecting for unsafe conditions .  
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment .  
Working inside the server with the power on.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 115  
. 115  
. 115  
. 116  
. 117  
. 118  
. 119  
. 119  
. 119  
. 120  
. 121  
. 121  
. 121  
. 122  
. 122  
. 124  
. 125  
. 126  
. 126  
. 127  
. 128  
. 129  
. 130  
. 130  
. 132  
. 133  
. 133  
. 134  
. 134  
. 134  
. 135  
. 136  
. 136  
. 138  
. 139  
. 140  
. 141  
. 143  
. 144  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Handling static-sensitive devices .  
Major components of the server .  
Removing and installing the cover  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing the cover .  
Installing the cover  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing and installing the bezel  
Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle  
Removing the DIMM air baffle  
Installing the DIMM air baffle .  
Replacing a memory module (DIMM) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Supported memory types  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing a memory module .  
Installing a memory module  
Replacing hard disk drives .  
.
.
.
Removing a simple-swap Serial ATA (SATA) hard disk drive  
Installing a simple-swap Serial ATA (SATA) hard disk drive .  
Removing a hot-swap hard disk drive .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive  
.
.
.
.
Replacing a PCI card .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing a PCI card.  
Installing a PCI card .  
Replacing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device  
Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device  
Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device  
Replacing the operator information panel assembly.  
.
Removing the operator information panel assembly  
Installing the operator information panel assembly .  
Replacing the drive cage  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing the drive cage  
Installing the drive cage .  
Replacing the microprocessor and heat sink .  
Removing the microprocessor .  
Installing the microprocessor .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Thermal grease .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replacing the system board  
iv ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the system board  
Installing the system board .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 144  
. 145  
. 146  
. 147  
. 148  
. 149  
. 149  
. 150  
. 151  
. 151  
. 152  
. 154  
. 154  
. 154  
. 156  
. 157  
. 157  
. 157  
. 158  
. 159  
. 159  
. 160  
. 162  
. 162  
. 163  
. 164  
. 164  
. 165  
. 167  
. 167  
. 167  
. 168  
. 168  
. 169  
. 169  
. 171  
. 173  
. 174  
. 175  
Replacing the power supply  
.
Removing the power supply  
Installing the power supply  
Replacing a fan assembly  
.
.
.
.
Removing a fan assembly  
Installing a fan assembly  
Replacing the system-board battery .  
Removing the battery  
Installing the battery .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replacing the SAS/SATA hard disk drive back plate or backplane.  
Removing the backplane or back plate (3.5-inch drives)  
Installing the backplane or back plate (3.5-inch drives)  
Removing the SAS backplane (2.5-inch drives)  
Installing the SAS backplane (2.5-inch drives)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replacing the PCI riser-card assembly .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing the riser-card assembly  
Installing the riser-card assembly .  
Replacing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller .  
Removing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller .  
Installing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller  
Replacing the DVD drive cable  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing the DVD drive cable  
Installing the DVD drive cable  
Replacing a DVD drive .  
Removing a DVD drive .  
Installing a DVD drive  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replacing the virtual media key .  
Removing the virtual media key .  
Installing the virtual media key  
Replacing the PCI-X riser-card power cable  
Removing the PCI-X riser-card power cable  
Installing the PCI-X riser-card power cable  
Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) .  
.
Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data.  
Completing the FRU replacement  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Connecting the cables  
.
.
.
Updating the server configuration  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Replaceable server components  
Power cords .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 179  
. 194  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 8. Configuring the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Using the Setup Utility .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 200  
. 200  
. 200  
. 203  
. 205  
. 205  
. 206  
. 208  
. 208  
. 208  
. 208  
. 209  
. 209  
. 209  
. 210  
Starting the Setup Utility  
Setup Utility menu choices .  
Passwords  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the Boot Manager program  
Configuring RAID controllers .  
Using LSI Configuration Utility program .  
Using the WebBIOS utility .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Starting the WebBIOS utility  
Main menu of the WebBIOS utility .  
Creating a storage configuration using the Configuration Wizard .  
Viewing and changing properties.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Viewing and changing virtual disk properties  
Using the EasyStartup DVD.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Before you use the EasyStartup DVD.  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EasyStartup overview  
Installing your operating system without using EasyStartup.  
Updating the firmware .  
Using the EasyUpdate Firmware Updater tool  
Starting the backup server firmware.  
Recovering the UEFI firmware  
Using the integrated management module.  
IBM Advanced Settings Utility program  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 210  
. 212  
. 212  
. 213  
. 213  
. 213  
. 215  
. 216  
. 216  
. 216  
. 216  
. 217  
. 218  
. 218  
. 218  
. 218  
. 219  
. 219  
. 219  
. 220  
. 220  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing ThinkServer EasyManage software .  
Installation requirements  
Installation order .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing Windows 2008 32-bit components .  
Uninstalling the LANDesk Software Agent  
Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture .  
.
Enabling the remote presence feature  
Obtaining the IP address for the IMM .  
Logging on to the Web interface .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Enabling the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program  
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controllers .  
Enabling and configuring Serial over LAN (SOL)  
UEFI update and configuration  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Trademarks .  
Important notes  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 222  
. 222  
. 223  
. 224  
. 224  
. 225  
. 226  
. 226  
. 226  
. 226  
. 226  
. 226  
. 227  
. 227  
. 227  
. 228  
. 228  
. 229  
. 229  
Product recycling and disposal  
Compliance with Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of Hazardous Substances  
Recycling statements for Japan  
Battery return program .  
German Ordinance for Work gloss statement .  
Electronic emission notices .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement  
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement .  
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada .  
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement  
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement .  
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement .  
Germany Class A compliance statement  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement  
Taiwan Class A warning statement .  
People’s Republic of China Class A warning statement  
Korea Class A warning statement. .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
vi ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. About this manual  
This Hardware Maintenance Manual contains information to help you solve problems that might occur in  
your server. It describes the diagnostic tools that come with the server, error codes and suggested actions,  
and instructions for replacing failing components.  
Replaceable components are of three types:  
v Self-service customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of self-service CRUs is your responsibility.  
If Lenovo® installs a self-service CRU at your request, you will be charged for the installation.  
v Optional-service customer replaceable unit: You may install an optional-service CRU yourself or  
request Lenovo to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty service that is  
designated for the server.  
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service technicians.  
The most recent version of this document is available at http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
Before servicing a Lenovo product, be sure to read the Safety Information. See “Important Safety  
Information.”  
For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance, see the Warranty and  
Support Information document.  
Important Safety Information  
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this book before performing any of the instructions.  
Veuillez lire toutes les consignes de type DANGER et ATTENTION du présent document avant  
d’exécuter les instructions.  
Lesen Sie unbedingt alle Hinweise vom Typ ″ACHTUNG″ oder ″VORSICHT″ in dieser Dokumentation,  
bevor Sie irgendwelche Vorgänge durchführen  
Leggere le istruzioni introdotte da ATTENZIONE e PERICOLO presenti nel manuale prima di eseguire  
una qualsiasi delle istruzioni  
Certifique-se de ler todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo neste manual antes de executar qualquer uma  
das instruções  
Es importante que lea todas las declaraciones de precaución y de peligro de este manual antes de seguir  
las instrucciones.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2007, 2009.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
 
Safety statements  
Important:  
Each caution and danger statement in this document is labeled with a number. This number is used to  
cross reference an English-language caution or danger statement with translated versions of the caution  
or danger statement in the Safety Information document.  
For example, if a caution statement is labeled ″Statement 1,″ translations for that caution statement are in  
the Safety Information document under ″Statement 1.″  
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this document before you perform the procedures.  
Read any additional safety information that comes with the server or optional device before you install  
the device.  
Attention: Use No. 26 AWG or larger UL-listed or CSA certified telecommunication line cord.  
2
ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 1:  
DANGER  
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous.  
To avoid a shock hazard:  
v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,  
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm.  
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet.  
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to this product.  
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables.  
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage.  
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before  
you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration  
procedures.  
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when installing, moving, or  
opening covers on this product or attached devices.  
To Connect:  
To Disconnect:  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
2. First, attach all cables to devices.  
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.  
4. Attach power cords to outlet.  
5. Turn device ON.  
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.  
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.  
4. Remove all cables from devices.  
Chapter 1. About this manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Statement 2:  
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only a type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your  
system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type made by  
the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or  
disposed of.  
Do not:  
v Throw or immerse into water  
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)  
v Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
4
ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or transmitters) are  
installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to  
hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein  
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical  
instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Laser Klasse 1  
Laser Klass 1  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
`
Appareil A Laser de Classe 1  
Chapter 1. About this manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Statement 4:  
≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb)  
≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb)  
≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe practices when lifting.  
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power supply do not turn off the  
electrical current supplied to the device. The device also might have more than one power cord. To  
remove all electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the  
power source.  
2
1
6
ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 8:  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label  
attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one  
of these parts, contact a service technician.  
Statement 26:  
CAUTION:  
Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices.  
Attention: This server is suitable for use on an IT power distribution system whose maximum  
phase-to-phase voltage is 240 V under any distribution fault condition.  
Important: This product is not suitable for use with visual display workplace devices according to Clause  
2 of the German Ordinance for Work with Visual Display Units.  
Important information about replacing RoHS compliant FRUs  
RoHS, The Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive  
(2002/95/EC) is a European Union legal requirement affecting the global electronics industry. RoHS  
requirements must be implemented on Lenovo products placed on the market and sold in the  
European Union after June 2006. Products on the market before June 2006 are not required to have  
RoHS compliant parts. If the parts are not compliant originally, replacement parts can also be  
noncompliant, but in all cases, if the parts are compliant, the replacement parts must also be  
compliant.  
Note: RoHS and non-RoHS FRU part numbers with the same fit and function are identified with unique  
FRU part numbers.  
Lenovo plans to transition to RoHS compliance well before the implementation date and expects its  
suppliers to be ready to support Lenovo’s requirements and schedule in the EU. Products sold in 2005  
will contain some RoHS compliant FRUs. The following statement pertains to these products and any  
product Lenovo produces containing RoHS compliant parts.  
Chapter 1. About this manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
 
RoHS compliant ThinkServer RS210 parts have unique FRU part numbers. Before or after June, 2006,  
failed RoHS compliant parts must always be replaced using RoHS compliant FRUs, so only the FRUs  
identified as compliant in the system Hardware Maintenance Manual or direct substitutions for those  
FRUs can be used.  
Products marketed before June 2006  
Products marketed after June 2006  
Current or original part  
Non-RoHS  
Replacement FRU  
Current or original part  
Replacement FRU  
Must be RoHS  
Can be Non-RoHS  
Can be RoHS  
Must be RoHS  
Non-RoHS  
Non-RoHS  
Can sub to RoHS  
Must be RoHS  
RoHS  
Note: A direct substitution is a part with a different FRU part number that is automatically shipped by  
the distribution center at the time of order.  
Turkish statement of compliance  
The Lenovo product meets the requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the  
Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE).  
Türkiye EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygunluk Beyanı  
Bu Lenovo ürünü, T.C. Çevre ve Orman Bakanlığı'nın “Elektrik  
ve Elektronik Eşyalarda Bazı Zararlı Maddelerin Kullanımının  
Sınırlandırılmasına Dair Yönetmelik (EEE)” direktiflerine uygundur.  
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.  
8
ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2. General information  
This chapter provides general information that applies to all machine types supported by this publication.  
Features and technologies  
The server uses the following features and technologies:  
v UEFI-compliant server firmware  
UEFI replaces the basic input/output system (BIOS) and defines a standard interface between the  
operating system, platform firmware, and external devices. The server design combines the UEFI  
capabilities and features with legacy BIOS compatibility. UEFI-compliant servers are capable of starting  
UEFI-compliant operating systems, BIOS-based operating systems, and BIOS-based adapters as well as  
UEFI-compliant adapters.  
Note: This server does not support DOS.  
v Dual-core or quad-core processing  
The server supports one Intel® Xeon® or Celeron® dual-core or quad-core microprocessor.  
v Integrated management module  
The Integrated management module (IMM) combines service processor functions, video controller, and  
(when an optional virtual media key is installed) remote presence function in a single chip. The IMM  
provides advanced service-processor control, monitoring, and alerting function. If an environmental  
condition exceeds a threshold or if a system component fails, the IMM lights LEDs to help you  
diagnose the problem, records the error in the event log, and alerts you to the problem. Optionally, the  
IMM also provides a virtual presence capability for remote server management capabilities. The IMM  
provides remote server management through the following industry-standard interfaces:  
– Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) version 2.0  
– Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 3  
– Common Information Model (CIM)  
– Web browser  
For additional information, see “Using the integrated management module” on page 215.  
v Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture  
The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of the integrated  
management module (IMM) and are available with the purchase of the optional Lenovo Virtual Media  
Key. A virtual media key is required to enable the remote presence and blue-screen capture features.  
The remote presence feature provides the following functions:  
– Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1280 x 1024, regardless of the system state  
– Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote client  
– Mapping the DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a remote client, and mapping ISO  
and diskette image files as virtual drives that are available for use by the server  
– Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server as a virtual drive  
The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the IMM restarts the server  
when the IMM detects an operating-system hang condition. A system administrator can use the  
blue-screen capture to assist in determining the cause of the hang condition.  
See“Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture” on page 218 for additional  
information.  
v Large system-memory capability  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2007, 2009.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
 
The memory bus supports up to 24 GB of memory when registered DIMMs are installed. The server  
supports up to 8 GB if unbuffered DIMMs are installed. The memory controller supports error  
correcting code (ECC) for up to six industry-standard PC3-8500 or PC3-10600R-999, 1066 and 1333  
MHz, DDR3 (third-generation double-data-rate), registered or unbuffered, synchronous dynamic  
random access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).  
v Integrated network support  
The server comes with an integrated Intel Gigabit Ethernet controller, which supports connection to a  
10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1000 Mbps network. For more information, see “Configuring the Gigabit  
Ethernet controllers” on page 219.  
v Integrated Trust Platform Module  
This integrated security chip performs cryptographic functions and stores private and public secure  
keys. It provides the hardware support for the Trusted Computing Group (TCG) specification.  
v Large data-storage capacity and hot-swap capability  
The server supports a maximum of four 2.5-inch hot-swap Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) hard disk drives,  
two 3.5-inch simple-swap Serial ATA (SATA) hard disk drives, or two 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS or SATA  
hard disk drives, depending on the server model.  
With the hot-swap feature, you can add, remove, or replace hard disk drives without turning off the  
server.  
v PCI card capabilities  
The server has two PCI interface slots (one supports low-profile cards and one supports half-length,  
full-height cards). Both slots can support PCI Express PCI cards.  
v RAID support  
The RAID controller provides hardware redundant array of independent disks (RAID) support. The  
standard RAID controller provides RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E. Optional RAID PCI cards are available for  
purchase that provide additional RAID levels.  
v Systems-management capabilities  
The server comes with an Integrated Management Module (IMM). When the IMM is used with the  
systems-management software that comes with the server, you can manage the functions of the server  
locally and remotely. The IMM also provides system monitoring, event recording, and network alert  
capability. The systems-management connector provides additional security by physically separating  
the management network traffic from the production network. You can use the Setup Utility to  
configure the server to use a dedicated systems-management network or a shared network.  
v TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) support  
The Ethernet controllers in the server support TOE, which is a technology that offloads the TCP/IP  
flow from the microprocessor and I/O subsystem to increase the speed of the TCP/IP flow. When an  
operating system that supports TOE is running on the server and TOE is enabled, the server supports  
TOE operation. See the operating-system documentation for information about enabling TOE.  
Note: The Linux operating system does not support TOE.  
v Preboot diagnostics program  
The preboot diagnostics programs are stored on the integrated USB memory. They collect and analyze  
system information to aid in diagnosing server problems. The diagnostic programs collect the following  
information about the server:  
– System configuration  
– Network interfaces and settings  
– Installed hardware  
– Service processor status and configuration  
– Vital product data, firmware, and UEFI (formerly called BIOS) configuration  
– Hard disk drive health  
– RAID controller configuration  
10 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– Event logs for RAID controllers and service processors  
The diagnostics programs create a merged log that includes events from all collected logs. The  
information is collected into a file that you can send to the Lenovo technical support team to help  
diagnose a problem. Additionally, you can view the information locally through a generated text report  
file. You can also copy the log to a removable medium and view the HTML log from a Web browser.  
For additional information about diagnostics, see Chapter 4, “Diagnostics,” on page 19.  
v EasyStartup DVD  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program guides you through the configuration of RAID controllers and  
the installation of the operating system and device drivers. See “Using the EasyStartup DVD” on page  
209 for details.  
v EasyManage DVD  
The ThinkServer EasyManage program helps you manage and administer your servers through remote  
problem notification as well as monitoring and alerting.  
Specifications  
The following information is a summary of the features and specifications of the server. Depending on  
the server model, some features might not be available, or some specifications might not apply.  
Table 1. Features and specifications  
Microprocessor:  
SATA optical drives:  
Integrated functions:  
v
Integrated management module (IMM),  
which provides service processor control  
and monitoring functions, video  
controller, and (when the optional  
virtual media key is installed) remote  
keyboard, video, mouse, and remote  
hard disk drive capabilities  
Intel 82574L Gb Ethernet controller with  
TCP/IP Offload Engine (TOE) and Wake  
on LAN® support  
v
Supports one Intel® quad-core (Xeon  
3400 series) or dual-core (Celeron G1101,  
Pentium G6950, or core i3 series)  
processor with the IbexPeak 3420 chip  
set and Multi-chip Package (MCP)  
processor architecture  
v
v
UltraSlim DVD-ROM combo (optional)  
Multi-burner (optional)  
Hard disk drive expansion bays  
(depending on the model):  
One of the following configurations:  
v
v
v
Designed for LGA 1156 socket  
Scalable up to four cores  
v
v
v
v
v
Four 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS hard disk  
drive bays  
32 KB instruction cache, 32 KB data  
cache, and up to 8 MB cache that is  
shared among the cores  
Support for Intel® Extended Memory 64  
Two 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS or hot-swap  
SATA hard disk drive bays  
Seven Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0  
ports (two front, four rear, and one  
internal for the optional USB  
Hypervisor flash device)  
Two 3.5-inch simple-swap SAS hard  
disk drive bays  
v
Technology (EM64T)  
v
v
v
Two Ethernet ports  
Four-port integrated SATA controller  
Integrated Trusted Platform Module  
(TPM) support  
One serial port  
One VGA port  
Note:  
Use the Setup utility to determine the  
type and speed of the microprocessor.  
PCI expansion slots:  
v
Supports two PCI riser slots on the riser  
card that connects to slots 1 and 2 on the  
system board:  
v
v
Memory:  
v
Minimum: 1 GB  
Maximum: 32 GB  
v
Slot 1 supports low-profile cards (PCI  
Express Gen2 x8  
v
–
16 GB using unbuffered DIMMs  
(UDIMMs)  
v
Slot 2 supports 3/4-length, full-height  
cards (PCI Express Gen2 x8 or PCI-X  
1.0a 64-bit/133 MHz)  
–
32 GB using registered DIMMs  
(RDIMMs)  
v
Types: PC3-8500 or PC3-10600R-999  
(single-rank or double-rank), 1066, and  
1333 MHz, ECC, DDR3 registered or  
unbuffered SDRAM DIMMs only  
Connectors: Six dual inline memory  
module (DIMM) connectors, two-way  
interleaved  
Power supply:  
One 351-watt power supply or one  
351-watt high efficiency power supply.  
v
v
Fans: The server comes standard with five  
speed-controlled fans.  
Supports:  
–
–
1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB (when  
available) unbuffered DIMMS  
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8 GB (when  
available) registered DIMMs  
Chapter 2. General information 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 1. Features and specifications (continued)  
RAID controllers: Video controller (integrated into IMM):  
Notes:  
v
v
v
v
v
Matrox G200  
v
An IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA  
Controller that provides RAID levels 0,  
1, and 1E (comes standard on some  
hot-swap SAS and hot-swap SATA  
models).  
1. Power consumption and heat output  
vary depending on the number and  
type of optional features installed and  
the power-management optional  
features in use.  
SVGA compatible video controller  
DDR2 128 MB SDRAM video memory  
Avocent Digital Video Compression  
Video memory is not expandable  
v
v
An optional IBM ServeRAID-MR10i  
SAS/SATA Controller SAS/SATA  
adapter that provides RAID levels 0, 1,  
5, 6, and 10 can be ordered.  
Note: The maximum video resolution is  
1280 x 1024  
2. The sound levels were measured in  
controlled acoustical environments  
according to the procedures specified  
by the American National Standards  
Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779  
and are reported in accordance with  
ISO 9296. Actual sound-pressure levels  
in a given location might exceed the  
average values stated because of room  
reflections and other nearby noise  
sources. The noise emission level stated  
in the declared (upper limit)  
Size:  
v
v
v
v
Height: 43 mm (1.69 inches, 1U)  
Depth: 560.1 mm (22 inches)  
Width: 430 mm (17.3 inches)  
Maximum weight: 11.4 kg (25.1 lb)  
when fully configured  
An optional IBM ServeRAID-M1015  
SAS/SATA controller that provides  
RAID levels 0,1,10, and 5 can be  
ordered.  
Acoustical noise emissions:  
Heat output:  
v
Sound power, idling: 6.5 bels maximum  
Sound power, operating: 6.5 bels  
maximum  
v
Approximate heat output:  
sound-power level, in bels, for a  
random sample of system.  
v
Minimum configuration: 171 BTU per  
hour (50 watts)  
Environment:  
v
Maximum configuration: 1024 BTU per  
hour (300 watts)  
3. There is no keyboard connector or  
mouse connector on the server. You  
can connect a USB keyboard and USB  
mouse to the server by using the USB  
connectors.  
v
Air temperature:  
–
Server on: 10°C to 35°C (50.0°F to  
95.0°F); altitude: 0 to 914.4 m (3000 ft)  
Server on: 10°C to 32°C (50.0°F to  
89.6°F); altitude: 914.4 m (3000 ft) to  
2133.6 m (7000.0 ft)  
Electrical input:  
–
v
Sine-wave input (50 / 60 Hz) required  
Input voltage low range:  
v
–
–
Minimum: 100 V ac  
Maximum: 127 V ac  
–
–
Server off: 10°C to 43°C  
(50°F to 109.4°F); maximum altitude:  
2133.6 m (7000.0 ft)  
v
v
Input voltage high range:  
–
–
Minimum: 200 V ac  
Maximum: 240 V ac  
Shipping: -40°C to 60°C  
(-104°F to 140°F)  
Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA),  
approximately:  
v
v
Humidity:  
–
–
Server on: 8% to 80%  
Server off: 8% to 80%  
–
–
Minimum: 0.102 kVA  
Maximum: 0.55 kVA  
Particulate contamination:  
Attention: Airborne particulates and  
reactive gases acting alone or in  
combination with other environmental  
factors such as humidity or temperature  
might pose a risk to the server. For  
information about the limits for  
particulates and gases, see “Notices,” on  
page 221.  
Software  
Lenovo provides software to help get your server up and running.  
EasyStartup  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program simplifies the process of configuring your RAID controllers and  
installing supported Microsoft Windows and Linux operating systems and device drivers on your server.  
The EasyStartup program is provided with your server on DVD. The DVD is self starting (bootable). The  
User Guide for the EasyStartup program is on the DVD and can be accessed directly from the program  
interface. For additional information, see “Using the EasyStartup DVD” on page 209.  
12 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EasyManage  
The ThinkServer EasyManage Core server provides centralized hardware and software inventory  
management and secure automated system management through a centralized console. The ThinkServer  
EasyManage Agent enables other clients on the network to be managed by the centralized console. The  
ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server is supported on 32-bit Windows Server 2008 products. The  
ThinkServer EasyManage Agent is supported on 32-bit and 64-bit Windows, Red Hat, and SUSE  
operating systems.  
Chapter 2. General information 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
14 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. General Checkout  
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the troubleshooting procedures in  
this Hardware Maintenance Manual and on the Lenovo Web site. This document describes the diagnostic  
tests that you can perform, troubleshooting procedures, and explanations of error messages and error  
codes. The documentation that comes with your operating system and software also contains  
troubleshooting information.  
Checkout procedure  
The checkout procedure is the sequence of tasks that you should follow to diagnose a problem in the  
server.  
About the checkout procedure  
Before you perform the checkout procedure for diagnosing hardware problems, review the following  
information:  
v Read the safety information that begins on page 1.  
v The diagnostic programs provide the primary methods of testing the major components of the server,  
such as the system board, Ethernet controller, keyboard, mouse (pointing device), serial ports, and hard  
disk drives. You can also use them to test some external devices. If you are not sure whether a problem  
is caused by the hardware or by the software, you can use the diagnostic programs to confirm that the  
hardware is working correctly.  
v When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause more than one error message.  
When this happens, correct the cause of the first error message. The other error messages usually will  
not occur the next time you run the diagnostic programs.  
Exception: If multiple error codes or system-board LEDs indicate a microprocessor error, the error  
might be in the microprocessor or in the microprocessor socket. See “Microprocessor problems” on  
page 58 for information about diagnosing microprocessor problems.  
v Before you run the diagnostic programs, you must determine whether the failing server is part of a  
shared hard disk drive cluster (two or more servers sharing external storage devices). If it is part of a  
cluster, you can run all diagnostic programs except the ones that test the storage unit (that is, a hard  
disk drive in the storage unit) or the storage adapter that is attached to the storage unit. The failing  
server might be part of a cluster if any of the following conditions is true:  
– You have identified the failing server as part of a cluster (two or more servers sharing external  
storage devices).  
– One or more external storage units are attached to the failing server and at least one of the attached  
storage units is also attached to another server or unidentifiable device.  
– One or more servers are located near the failing server.  
Important: If the server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster, run one test at a time. Do not run  
any suite of tests, such as “quick” or “normal” tests, because this might enable the hard disk drive  
diagnostic tests.  
v If the server is halted and a POST error code is displayed, see “Event logs” on page 19. If the server is  
halted and no error message is displayed, see “Troubleshooting tables” on page 50 and “Solving  
undetermined problems” on page 103.  
v For information about power-supply problems, see “Solving power problems” on page 102.  
v For intermittent problems, check the error log; see “Event logs” on page 19 and “Diagnostic programs  
and messages” on page 68.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2007, 2009.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
 
Performing the checkout procedure  
To perform the checkout procedure, complete the following steps:  
1. Is the server part of a cluster?  
v No: Go to step 2.  
v Yes: Shut down all failing servers that are related to the cluster. Go to step 2.  
2. Complete the following steps:  
a. Check the power supply LEDs (see “Power-supply LEDs” on page 67).  
b. Turn off the server and all external devices.  
c. Check all internal and external devices for compatibility at http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
d. Check all cables and power cords.  
e. Set all display controls to the middle positions.  
f. Turn on all external devices.  
g. Turn on the server. If the server does not start, see “Troubleshooting tables” on page 50.  
h. Check the system-error LED on the operator information panel. If it is flashing, check the LEDs on  
the system board (see “System-board LEDs” on page 112).  
i. Check for the following results:  
v Successful completion of POST (see “POST” on page 21 for more information)  
v Successful completion of startup  
Diagnosing a problem  
Before you contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service provider, follow these procedures in the  
order in which they are presented to diagnose a problem with your server:  
1. Determine what has changed.  
Determine whether any of the following items were added, removed, replaced, or updated before the  
problem occurred:  
v Device drivers  
v Server firmware  
v Hardware components  
v Software  
If possible, return the server to the condition it was in before the problem occurred.  
2. Collect data.  
Thorough data collection is necessary for diagnosing hardware and software problems.  
a. Document error codes and system-board LEDs.  
v System error codes: See “POST error codes” on page 21 for information about a specific error  
code.  
v See “System-board LEDs” on page 112 for the location of the system-board LEDs.  
v Software or operating-system error codes: See the documentation for the software or operating  
system for information about a specific error code. See the manufacturer’s Web site for  
documentation.  
b. Collect system data.  
Run the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) diagnostics program to collect information about the  
hardware, firmware, software, and operating system. Have this information available when you  
contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service provider. See “Diagnostic programs and  
messages” on page 68 for the instructions to run the DSA program.  
If you need to download the latest version of DSA , go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Follow the problem-resolution procedures.  
16 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The four problem-resolution procedures are presented in the order in which they are most likely to  
solve your problem. Follow these procedures in the order in which they are presented:  
a. Check for and apply code updates.  
Most problems that appear to be caused by faulty hardware are actually caused by the server  
firmware (formerly BIOS firmware), device firmware, or device drivers that are not at the latest  
levels.  
1) Determine the existing code levels.  
In DSA, click Firmware/VPD to view system firmware levels, or click Software to view  
operating-system levels.  
2) Download and install updates of code that is not at the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code updates. If  
the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code is supported for the  
cluster solution before you update the code.  
To display a list of available updates for your server, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
When you click an update, an information page is displayed, including a list of the problems  
that the update fixes. Review this list for your specific problem; however, even if your problem  
is not listed, installing the update might solve the problem.  
b. Check for and correct an incorrect configuration.  
If the server is incorrectly configured, a system function can fail to work when you enable it; if  
you make an incorrect change to the server configuration, a system function that has been enabled  
can stop working.  
1) Make sure that all installed hardware and software are supported.  
See http://www.lenovo.com/support to verify that the server supports the installed operating  
system, optional devices, and software levels. If any hardware or software component is not  
supported, uninstall it to determine whether it is causing the problem. You must remove  
nonsupported hardware before you contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service provider  
for support.  
2) Make sure that the server, operating system, and software are installed and configured  
correctly.  
Many configuration problems are caused by loose power or signal cables or incorrectly seated  
adapters. You might be able to solve the problem by turning off the server, reconnecting cables,  
reseating adapters, and turning the server back on. See “Checkout procedure” on page 15 for  
the instructions to perform the checkout procedures.  
If the problem is associated with a specific function (for example, if a RAID hard disk drive is  
marked offline in the RAID array), see the documentation for the associated controller and  
management or controlling software to verify that the controller is correctly configured.  
Problem determination information is available for many devices such as RAID and network  
adapters.  
For problems with operating systems or Lenovo software or devices, complete the following  
steps.  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual procedure might vary  
slightly from what is described in this document.  
a) Go to: http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b) From the Select your product list, select Servers and Storage.  
c) In the Browse by product window Family: list, select ThinkServer RS210.  
d) Click Downloads and drivers .  
e) Click User’s guides and manuals to look for related documentation.  
c. Check for service bulletins.  
Chapter 3. General Checkout 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lenovo service bulletins document known problems and suggested solutions. To search for service  
bulletins, complete the following steps.  
1) Go to: http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
2) From the Select your product list, select Servers and Storage.  
3) In the Browse by product window Family: list, select ThinkServer RS210.  
4) Click Downloads and drivers to look for service information.  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual procedure might vary  
slightly from what is described in this document.  
d. Check for and replace defective hardware.  
If a hardware component is not operating within specifications, it can cause unpredictable results.  
Most hardware failures are reported as error codes in a system or operating-system log. See  
“Troubleshooting tables” on page 50 and Chapter 6, “Replacing FRUs,” on page 115 for more  
information. Hardware errors are also indicated by LEDs on the system board (see “System-board  
LEDs” on page 112 for more information).  
Troubleshooting procedures are also provided on the Lenovo Web site. A single problem might  
cause multiple symptoms. Follow the diagnostic procedure for the most obvious symptom. If that  
procedure does not diagnose the problem, use the procedure for another symptom, if possible. To  
locate troubleshooting procedures for your server, complete the following steps.  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual procedure might vary  
slightly from what is described in this document.  
1) Go to: http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
2) From the Select your product list, select Servers and Storage.  
3) In the Browse by product window Family: list, select ThinkServer RS210.  
4) Under Support & downloads, click Troubleshoot.  
5) Under Diagnostic, select the troubleshooting procedure for the symptom that you are  
observing.  
For more troubleshooting information, see Chapter 4, “Diagnostics,” on page 19.  
If the problem remains, contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service provider for assistance  
with additional problem determination and possible hardware replacement. Be prepared to  
provide information about any error codes and collected data.  
Undocumented problems  
If you have completed the diagnostic procedure and the problem remains, the problem might not have  
been previously identified by Lenovo. After you have verified that all code is at the latest level, all  
hardware and software configurations are valid, and no LEDs or log entries indicate a hardware  
component failure, contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service provider for assistance. Be prepared  
to provide information about any error codes and collected data and the problem determination  
procedures that you have used.  
18 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4. Diagnostics  
This chapter describes the diagnostic tools that are available to help you solve problems that might occur  
in the server.  
Diagnostic tools  
The following tools are available to help you diagnose and solve hardware-related problems:  
v POST error messages and error logs  
The power-on self-test (POST) generates messages to indicate successful test completion or the  
detection of a problem. See “POST” on page 21, “Event logs,” and “POST error codes” on page 21 for  
more information.  
v Troubleshooting tables  
These tables list problem symptoms and actions to correct the problems. See “Troubleshooting tables”  
on page 50 for more information.  
v Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) Preboot diagnostic programs  
The DSA Preboot diagnostic programs provide problem isolation, configuration analysis, and error log  
collection. The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major components of the  
server and are stored in integrated USB memory. The diagnostic programs collect the following  
information about the server:  
– System configuration  
– Network interfaces and settings  
– Installed hardware  
– Service processor status and configuration  
– Vital product data, firmware, and UEFI configuration  
– Hard disk drive health  
– RAID controller configuration  
– Controller and service processor event logs, including the following information:  
- System error logs  
- Temperature, voltage, and fan speed information  
- Self-monitoring Analysis, and Reporting Technology (SMART) data  
- Machine check registers  
- USB information  
- Monitor configuration information  
- PCI slot information  
The diagnostic programs create a merged log that includes events from all collected logs. The  
information is collected into a file that you can send to Lenovo service and support. Additionally, you  
can view the server information locally through a generated text report file. You can also copy the log  
to removable media and view the log from a Web browser. See “Running the diagnostic programs” on  
page 69 for more information.  
v Server LEDs  
Use the LEDs on the server to diagnose system errors quickly. See “System-board LEDs” on page 112  
for more information.  
Event logs  
Error codes and messages are displayed in the following types of event logs:  
v POST event log: This log contains the three most recent error codes and messages that were generated  
during POST. You can view the POST event log through the Setup utility.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2007, 2009.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
 
v System-event log: This log contains messages that were generated during POST and all system status  
messages from the service processor. You can view the contents of the system-event log from the Setup  
utility for more information.  
The system-event log is limited in size. When it is full, new entries will not overwrite existing entries;  
therefore, you must periodically clear the system-event log through the Setup utility. When you are  
troubleshooting, you might have to clear the system-event log to make the most recent events available  
for analysis.  
Each system-event log entry is displayed on its own page. Message are listed on the left side of the  
screen, and details about the selected message is displayed on the right side of the screen. To move  
from one entry to the next, use the Up Arrow (↑) and Down Arrow (↓) keys.  
The system-event log indicates an assertion event when an event has occurred. It indicates a  
de-assertion event when the event is no longer occurring.  
v Integrated management module (IMM) event log: This log contains a filtered subset of all IMM,  
POST, and system management interrupt (SMI) events. You can view the IMM event log through the  
IMM Web interface and through the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program (as the ASM event log).  
v DSA log: This log is generated by the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program, and it is a  
chronologically ordered merge of the system-event log (as the IPMI event log), the IMM chassis-event  
log (as the ASM event log), and the operating-system event logs. You can view the DSA log through  
the DSA program.  
Viewing event logs through the Setup utility  
To view the POST event log or system-event log, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn on the server.  
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a power-on password and  
an administrator password, you must type the administrator password to view the event logs.  
3. Select System Event Logs and use one of the following procedures:  
v To view the POST event log, select POST Event Viewer.  
v To view the IMM system-event log, select System Event Log.  
Viewing event logs without restarting the server  
When the server is not hung and the IMM is connected to a network, methods are available for you to  
view one or more event logs without having to restart the server.  
You can use the DSA Preboot to view the system event log (as the IPMI event log), the IMM event log (as  
the ASM event log), or the merged DSA log. You must restart the server to use DSA Preboot to view  
those logs.  
You can view the IMM system event log through the Event Log link in the integrated management  
module (IMM) Web interface.  
Table 2. Methods for viewing event logs  
Condition  
Action  
The server is not hung and is connected to a network.  
v Use IPMItool to view the system-event log.  
The server is not hung and is not connected to a  
network.  
Use IPMItool locally to view the system-event log.  
20 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2. Methods for viewing event logs (continued)  
Condition  
Action  
The server is hung.  
v If DSA Preboot is installed, restart the server and press  
F2 to start DSA Preboot and view the event logs.  
v If DSA Preboot is not installed, insert the DSA Preboot  
CD and restart the server to start DSA Preboot and  
view the event logs.  
v Alternatively, you can restart the server and press F1  
to start the Setup utility and view the POST event log  
or system-event log. For more information, see  
“Viewing event logs without restarting the server” on  
page 20.  
Clearing the event logs  
To clear the event logs, complete the following steps.  
Note: The POST event log is automatically cleared each time the server is restarted.  
1. Turn on the server.  
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a power-on password and  
an administrator password, you must type the administrator password to view the error logs.  
3. Use one of the following procedures:  
v To clear the IMM system-event log, select System Event Logs --> System Event Log. Select Clear  
System Event Log; then, press Enter twice.  
POST  
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of the server components  
and some optional devices in the server. This series of tests is called the power-on self-test, or POST.  
Note: This server does not use beep codes for server status.  
If a power-on password is set, you must type the password and press Enter, when you are prompted, for  
POST to run.  
If POST detects a problem, an error message is displayed. See “POST error codes” for more information.  
POST error codes  
The following table describes the POST error codes and suggested actions to correct the detected  
problems. These errors can appear as severe, warning, or informational.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
0010002  
Microprocessor not supported.  
1. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the  
microprocessor and restart the server.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove the  
microprocessor and install a new microprocessor.  
Restart the server. If the error is corrected, the old  
microprocessor is bad and must be replaced.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time.  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
0011000  
0011004  
Invalid microprocessor type.  
Microprocessor failed BIST.  
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212).  
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and  
replace the affected microprocessor (error LED is  
lit) with a supported type (see “Installing the  
microprocessor” on page 141).  
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212).  
2. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the  
microprocessor.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
001100A  
0050001  
Microcode updated failed.  
DIMM disabled.  
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212).  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
microprocessor.  
1. If the server fails the POST memory test, reseat  
the DIMMs.  
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the  
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a  
memory module” on page 124 and “Installing a  
memory module” on page 125).  
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA Preboot memory test (see “Running  
the diagnostic programs” on page 69).  
22 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
0051003  
Uncorrectable DIMM error  
1. If the server failed the POST memory test, reseat  
the DIMMs.  
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the  
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a  
memory module” on page 124 and “Installing a  
memory module” on page 125).  
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA Preboot memory test (see“Running  
the diagnostic programs” on page 69).  
0051006  
0051009  
DIMM mismatch detected  
No memory detected.  
Make sure that the DIMMs match and are installed in  
the correct sequence (see “Installing a memory  
module” on page 125).  
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs.  
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see  
“Installing a memory module” on page 125).  
005100A  
0058001  
No usable memory detected.  
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs.  
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see  
“Installing a memory module” on page 125).  
4. Clear CMOS memory to re-enable all the memory  
connectors (see “System-board switches and  
jumpers” on page 111).  
PFA threshold exceeded  
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212).  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run the memory test (see  
“Running the diagnostic programs” on page 69).  
3. Replace the failing DIMM, which is indicated by  
a lit LED on the system board.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
0058007  
DIMM population is unsupported.  
1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.  
2. Remove the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of  
those that are identified and replace it with an  
identical pair of known good DIMMs, then restart  
the server.  
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time,  
to their original connectors, restarting the server  
after each pair, until a pair fails. Replace the  
DIMMs in the failed pair with identical known  
good DIMMs, restarting the server after each  
DIMM is installed. Replace the failed DIMM.  
Repeat this step until you have tested all removed  
DIMMs.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
0058008  
DIMM failed memory test.  
1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.  
2. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, then restart the server after  
each:  
a. DIMM  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
00580A4  
0068002  
Memory population changed.  
CMOS battery cleared.  
Information only. Memory has been added, moved,  
or changed.  
1. Reseat the battery.  
2. Clear the CMOS memory (see Table 6 on page  
111).  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the following order, restarting the server after  
each one:  
a. Battery  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
2011001  
PCI-X PERR  
1. Check the riser-card LEDs.  
2. Reseat all affected adapters and riser cards.  
3. Update the PCI adapter firmware.  
4. Remove the adapter from the riser card.  
5. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Riser card  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
24 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
2018001  
PCI Express uncorrected or uncorrected error  
1. Check the riser-card LEDs.  
2. Reseat all affected adapters and riser cards.  
3. Update the PCI adapter firmware.  
4. Remove the adapter from the riser card.  
5. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Riser card  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
2018002  
Option ROM resource allocation failure  
Informational message that some devices might not  
be initialized.  
1. If possible, rearrange the order of the adapters in  
the PCI slots to change the load order of the  
optional-device ROM code.  
2. Run the Setup utility, select Startup Options, and  
change the boot priority to change the load order  
of the optional-device ROM code.  
3. Run the Setup utility and disable some other  
resources, if their functions are not being used, to  
make more space available.  
a. Select Startup Options → Planar Ethernet  
(PXE/DHCP) to disable the integrated  
Ethernet controller ROM.  
b. Select Advanced Functions → PCI Bus Control  
→ PCI ROM Control Execution to disable the  
ROM of the adapter in the PCI slots.  
c. Select Devices and I/O Ports to disable any of  
the integrated devices.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Each adapter  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
3xx0007 (xx  
can be 00 -  
19)  
Firmware fault detected, system halted  
1. Recover the server firmware to the latest level.  
2. Undo any recent configuration changes, or clear  
CMOS memory to restore the settings to the  
default values (see Table 6 on page 111).  
3. Remove any recently installed hardware.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
3038003  
Firmware corrupted  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings to recover the  
server firmware.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
3048005  
3048006  
Booted secondary (backup) UEFI image  
Information message that the backup UEFI settings  
are used.  
Booted secondary (backup) UEFI image  
because of ABR  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings to recover the  
primary UEFI settings.  
2. Turn off the server and remove it from the power  
source.  
3. Reconnect the server to the power source, then  
turn on the server.  
305000A  
RTC date/time is incorrect  
1. Adjust the date and time settings in the Setup  
utility, and then restart the server.  
2. Reseat the battery.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Battery  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
3058001  
System configuration invalid  
1. Run the Setup utility, and select Save Settings.  
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Battery  
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, it must  
be replaced by a trained service technician  
only)  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
26 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
3058004  
Three boot failure  
1. Undo any recent system changes, such as new  
settings or newly installed devices.  
2. Make sure that the server is attached to a reliable  
power source.  
3. Make sure that the operating system is not  
corrupted.  
4. Run the Setup utility, save the configuration, and  
then restart the server.  
5. See “Problem determination tips” on page 104.  
3108007  
3138002  
System configuration restored to default  
settings  
Information only. This message is usually associated  
with the CMOS battery clear event.  
Boot configuration error  
1. Remove any recent configuration changes made  
to the Setup utility.  
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
3808000  
IMM communication failure  
1. Remove power from the server for 30 seconds,  
and then reconnect the server to power and  
restart it.  
2. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212).  
3. Make sure that the virtual media key is seated  
and not damaged.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
3808002  
3808003  
Error updating system configuration to IMM  
1. Remove power from the server, and then  
reconnect the server to power and restart it.  
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.  
3. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212).  
Error retrieving system configuration from  
IMM  
1. Remove power from the server, and then  
reconnect the server to power and restart it.  
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.  
3. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212).  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
3808004  
IMM system event log full  
v When using out-of-band, use the IMM Web  
interface or IPMItool to clear the logs from the  
operating system.  
v When using the local console:  
1. Run the Setup utility.  
2. Select System Event Log.  
3. Select Clear System Event Log.  
4. Restart the server.  
3818001  
3818002  
3818003  
3818004  
3818005  
3818006  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
update failed  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
update aborted  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
flash lock failed  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
system error  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Current Bank Core Root of Trust  
Measurement (CRTM) capsule signature  
invalid  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Opposite bank CRTM capsule signature  
invalid  
1. Switch the server firmware bank to the backup  
bank (see “Starting the backup server firmware”  
on page 213).  
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
3. Switch the bank back to the primary bank.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
3818007  
CRTM update capsule signature invalid  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
28 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
3828004  
AEM power capping disabled  
1. Check the settings and the event logs.  
2. Make sure that the Active Energy Manager  
feature is enabled in the Setup utility. Click  
System Settings → Power → Active Energy  
Manager → Capping Enabled .  
3. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212).  
4. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212).  
System-event log  
The system-event log contains messages of three types:  
Information  
Information messages do not require action; they record significant system-level events, such as  
when the server is started.  
Warning  
Warning messages do not require immediate action; they indicate possible problems, such as  
when the recommended maximum ambient temperature is exceeded.  
Error Error messages might require action; they indicate system errors, such as when a fan is not  
detected.  
Each message contains date and time information, and it indicates the source of the message (POST or  
the IMM).  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Integrated management module error messages  
The following table describes the IMM error messages and suggested actions to correct the detected  
problems.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Message  
Severity  
Description  
Action  
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp  
going high (upper critical) has  
asserted.  
Error  
An upper critical sensor  
going high has asserted.  
Reduce the ambient temperature.  
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp  
going high (upper non-recoverable)  
has asserted.  
Error  
An upper nonrecoverable  
sensor going high has  
asserted.  
Reduce the ambient temperature.  
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3V going  
low (lower critical) has asserted.  
Error  
Error  
A lower critical sensor going (Trained service technician only)  
low has asserted.  
Replace the system board.  
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3V going  
high (upper critical) has asserted.  
An upper critical sensor  
going high has asserted.  
(Trained service technician only)  
Replace the system board.  
Numeric sensor Planar 5V going low Error  
(lower critical) has asserted.  
A lower critical sensor going (Trained service technician only)  
low has asserted.  
Replace the system board.  
Numeric sensor Planar 5V going  
high (upper critical) has asserted.  
Error  
An upper critical sensor  
going high has asserted.  
(Trained service technician only)  
Replace the system board.  
Numeric sensor Planar VBAT going Error  
low (lower critical) has asserted.  
A lower critical sensor going Replace the 3 V battery.  
low has asserted.  
Numeric sensor Fan n Tach going  
low (lower critical) has asserted.  
(n = fan number)  
Error  
A lower critical sensor going  
low has asserted.  
1. Reseat the failing fan n, which  
is indicated by a lit LED on  
the system board (see  
“System-board LEDs” on  
page 112).  
2. Replace the failing fan.  
(n = fan number)  
30 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
The Processor CPU nStatus has  
Failed with IERR.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Error  
A processor failed - IERR  
condition has occurred.  
1. Make sure that the latest  
levels of firmware and device  
drivers are installed for all  
adapters and standard  
devices, such as Ethernet,  
SCSI, and SAS.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
2. Run the DSA program for the  
hard disk drives and other  
I/O devices.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
An Over-Temperature Condition has Error  
been detected on the Processor CPU  
nStatus.  
An overtemperature  
condition has occurred for  
microprocessor n.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow,  
that the air baffle is in place  
and correctly installed, and  
that the server cover is  
installed and completely  
closed.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
(n = microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the heat sink  
for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
The Processor CPU nStatus has  
Failed with FRB1/BIST condition.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Error  
A processor failed -  
FRB1/BIST condition has  
occurred.  
1. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important:: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
2. (Trained service technician  
only) Reseat microprocessor  
n.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
The Processor CPU nStatus has a  
Configuration Mismatch.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Error  
Error  
A processor configuration  
mismatch has occurred.  
1. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the  
microprocessor.  
An SM BIOS Uncorrectable CPU  
complex error for Processor CPU  
nStatus has asserted.  
An SMBIOS uncorrectable  
CPU complex error has  
asserted.  
1. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
2. (Trained service technician  
only) Reseat microprocessor  
n.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
32 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has  
transitioned to critical from a less  
severe state.  
Error  
Error  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow,  
that the air baffle is in place  
and correctly installed, and  
that the server cover is  
installed and completely  
closed.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the heat sink  
for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has  
transitioned to non-recoverable from  
a less severe state.  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state from a  
less severe state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow,  
that the air baffle is in place  
and correctly installed, and  
that the server cover is  
installed and completely  
closed.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the heat sink  
for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has  
transitioned to critical from a  
non-recoverable state.  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow,  
that the air baffle is in place  
and correctly installed, and  
that the server cover is  
installed and completely  
closed.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the heat sink  
for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow,  
that the air baffle is in place  
and correctly installed, and  
that the server cover is  
installed and completely  
closed.  
2. Make sure that the heat sink  
for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
A bus timeout has occurred on  
system %1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
A bus timeout has occurred.  
1. Remove the adapter from the  
PCI slot that is indicated by a  
lit LED.  
2. Replace the extender card.  
3. Remove all PCI adapters.  
4. (Trained service technicians  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
The System %1 encountered a POST Error  
Error.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
A POST error has occurred.  
(Sensor = ABR Status)  
1. Recover the server firmware  
from the backup page (see  
“Recovering the server  
firmware” on page 100).  
2. Update the server firmware to  
the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
34 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
The System %1 encountered a POST Error  
Error.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
A POST error has occurred.  
(Sensor = Firmware Error)  
1. Update the server firmware  
on the primary page.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
2. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has  
occurred on system %1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
A bus uncorrectable error  
has occurred.  
(Sensor = Critical Int PCI)  
1. Check the system-event log.  
2. Check the PCI error LEDs.  
3. Remove the adapter from the  
indicated PCI slot.  
4. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
5. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has  
occurred on system %1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
A bus uncorrectable error  
has occurred.  
(Sensor = Critical Int CPU)  
1. Check the system-event log.  
2. Check the microprocessor  
error LEDs.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
.
4. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
5. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has  
occurred on system %1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
A bus uncorrectable error  
has occurred.  
(Sensor = Critical Int DIM)  
1. Check the system-event log.  
2. Check the DIMM error LEDs.  
3. Remove the failing DIMM  
from the system board.  
4. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
5. Make sure that the installed  
DIMMs are supported and  
configured correctly.  
6. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
36 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Sensor Sys Board Fault has  
transitioned to critical from a less  
severe state.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
1. Check the system-event log.  
2. Check for an error LED on  
the system board.  
3. Replace any failing device.  
4. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
5. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Sensor RAID Error has transitioned Error  
to critical from a less severe state.  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
1. Check the hard disk drive  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the hard disk drive for  
which the status LED is lit.  
3. Replace the defective hard  
disk drive.  
The Drive n Status has been  
removed from unit Drive 0 Status.  
(n = hard disk drive number)  
Error  
A drive has been removed.  
Reseat hard disk drive n.  
(n = hard disk drive number)  
The Drive n Status has been disabled Error  
due to a detected fault.  
(n = hard disk drive number)  
A drive has been disabled  
because of a fault.  
1. Run the hard disk drive  
diagnostic test on drive n.  
2. Reseat the following  
components:  
a. Hard disk drive  
b. Cable from the system  
board to the backplane  
3. Replace the following  
components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Hard disk drive  
b. Cable from the system  
board to the backplane  
c. Hard disk drive backplane  
(n = hard disk drive number)  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Array %1 is in critical condition.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
Error  
An array is in Critical state. Replace the hard disk drive that  
(Sensor = Drive n Status)  
(n = hard disk drive  
number)  
is indicated by a lit status LED.  
Array %1 has failed.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
An array is in Failed state.  
(Sensor = Drive n Status)  
(n = hard disk drive  
number)  
Replace the hard disk drive that  
is indicated by a lit status LED.  
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error  
for DIMM All DIMMs on Memory  
Subsystem All DIMMs.  
A memory uncorrectable  
error has occurred.  
1. If the server failed the POST  
memory test, reseat the  
DIMMs.  
2. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Note: You do not have to  
replace DIMMs by pairs.  
3. Run the Setup utility to  
enable all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA memory test.  
Memory Logging Limit Reached for Error  
DIMM All DIMMs on Memory  
Subsystem All DIMMs.  
The memory logging limit  
has been reached.  
1. Update the server firmware to  
the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run  
the DSA memory test.  
3. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Memory DIMM Configuration Error Error  
for All DIMMs on Memory  
Subsystem All DIMMs.  
A DIMM configuration error Make sure that DIMMs are  
has occurred.  
installed in the correct sequence  
and have the same size, type,  
speed, and technology.  
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error  
for DIMM One of the DIMMs on  
Memory Subsystem One of the  
DIMMs.  
A memory uncorrectable  
error has occurred.  
1. If the server failed the POST  
memory test, reseat the  
DIMMs.  
2. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Note: You do not have to  
replace DIMMs by pairs.  
3. Run the Setup utility to  
enable all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA memory test.  
38 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Memory Logging Limit Reached for Error  
DIMM One of the DIMMs on  
Memory Subsystem One of the  
DIMMs.  
The memory logging limit  
has been reached.  
1. Update the server firmware to  
the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run  
the DSA memory test.  
3. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Memory DIMM Configuration Error Error  
for One of the DIMMs on Memory  
Subsystem One of the DIMMs.  
A DIMM configuration error Make sure that DIMMs are  
has occurred.  
installed in the correct sequence  
and have the same size, type,  
speed, and technology.  
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error  
for DIMM n Status on Memory  
Subsystem DIMM n Status.  
A memory uncorrectable  
error has occurred.  
1. If the server failed the POST  
memory test, reseat the  
DIMMs.  
(n = DIMM number)  
2. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Note: You do not have to  
replace DIMMs by pairs.  
3. Run the Setup utility to  
enable all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA memory test.  
5. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Memory Logging Limit Reached for Error  
DIMM nStatus on Memory  
Subsystem DIMMnStatus.  
The memory logging limit  
has been reached.  
1. Update the server firmware to  
the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
(n = DIMM number)  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run  
the DSA memory test.  
3. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Memory DIMM Configuration Error Error  
for DIMM nStatus on Memory  
Subsystem DIMM nStatus.  
A DIMM configuration error Make sure that DIMMs are  
has occurred.  
installed in the correct sequence  
and have the same size, type,  
speed, and technology.  
(n = DIMM number)  
Sensor DIMM n Temp has  
transitioned to critical from a less  
severe state.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow,  
that the air baffles are in place  
and correctly installed, and  
that the server cover is  
installed and completely  
closed.  
(n = DIMM number)  
2. If a fan has failed, complete  
the action for a fan failure.  
3. Replace DIMM n.  
(n = DIMM number)  
A PCI PERR has occurred on system Error  
%1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
A PCI PERR has occurred.  
(Sensor = PCI Slot n; n =  
PCI slot number)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and extender card.  
3. Update the server and  
adapter firmware (UEFI and  
IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
4. Remove the adapter from slot  
n.  
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.  
6. Replace extender card n.  
(n = PCI slot number)  
40 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
A PCI SERR has occurred on system Error  
%1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
A PCI SERR has occurred.  
(Sensor = PCI Slot n; n =  
PCI slot number)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and extender card.  
3. Update the server and  
adapter firmware (UEFI and  
IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
4. Remove the adapter from slot  
n.  
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.  
6. Replace extender card n.  
(n = PCI slot number)  
A PCI PERR has occurred on system Error  
%1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
A PCI PERR has occurred.  
(Sensor = One of PCI Err)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and riser card.  
3. Update the server and  
adapter firmware (UEFI and  
IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
4. Remove both adapters.  
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.  
6. Replace the extender card.  
7. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
A PCI SERR has occurred on system Error  
%1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
A PCI SERR has occurred.  
(Sensor = One of PCI Err)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and extender card.  
3. Update the server and  
adapter firmware (UEFI and  
IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
4. Remove both adapters.  
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.  
6. Replace the extender card.  
7. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Fault in slot System board on system Error  
%1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and extender card.  
3. Update the server and  
adapter firmware (UEFI and  
IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
4. Remove both adapters.  
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.  
6. Replace the extender card.  
7. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
42 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Redundancy Bckup Mem Status has Error  
been reduced.  
Redundancy has been lost  
and is insufficient to  
continue operation.  
1. Check the system-event log  
for DIMM failure events  
(uncorrectable or PFA) and  
correct the failures.  
2. Re-enable mirroring in the  
Setup utility.  
IMM Network Initialization  
Complete.  
Info  
An IMM network has  
completed initialization.  
No action; information only.  
Certificate Authority %1 has  
detected a %2 Certificate Error.  
(%1 = IBM_CertificateAuthority.  
CADistinguishedName;  
%2 = CIM_PublicKeyCertificate.  
ElementName)  
Error  
A problem has occurred  
with the SSL Server, SSL  
Client, or SSL Trusted CA  
certificate that has been  
imported into the IMM. The  
imported certificate must  
contain a public key that  
corresponds to the key pair  
that was previously  
1. Make sure that the certificate  
that you are importing is  
correct.  
2. Try importing the certificate  
again.  
generated by the Generate a  
New Key and Certificate  
Signing Request link.  
Ethernet Data Rate modified from  
%1 to %2 by user %3.  
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.Speed;  
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.Speed;  
%3 = user ID)  
Info  
Info  
A user has modified the  
Ethernet port data rate.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
Ethernet Duplex setting modified  
from %1 to %2 by user %3.  
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex;  
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex;  
%3 = user ID)  
A user has modified the  
Ethernet port duplex setting.  
Ethernet MTU setting modified from Info  
%1 to %2 by user %3.  
A user has modified the  
Ethernet port MTU setting.  
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.  
ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit;  
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.  
ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit;  
%3 = user ID)  
Ethernet Duplex setting modified  
from %1 to %2 by user %3.  
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.  
NetworkAddresses;  
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.  
NetworkAddresses;  
Info  
Info  
A user has modified the  
Ethernet port MAC address  
setting.  
No action; information only.  
%3 = user ID)  
Ethernet interface %1 by user %2.  
(%1 =  
CIM_EthernetPort.EnabledState;  
%2 = user ID)  
A user has enabled or  
disabled the Ethernet  
interface.  
No action; information only.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Hostname set to %1 by user %2.  
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.  
Hostname;  
Info  
Info  
A user has modified the host No action; information only.  
name of the IMM.  
%2 = user ID)  
IP address of network interface  
modified from %1 to %2 by user %3.  
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.  
IPv4Address;  
A user has modified the IP  
address of the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
%2 =  
CIM_StaticIPAssignmentSettingData.  
IPAddress;  
%3 = user ID)  
IP subnet mask of network interface Info  
modified from %1 to %2 by user  
%3s.  
A user has modified the IP  
subnet mask of the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.  
SubnetMask;  
%2 =  
CIM_StaticIPAssignmentSettingData.  
SubnetMask;  
%3 = user ID)  
IP address of default gateway  
modified from %1 to %2 by user  
%3s.  
Info  
A user has modified the  
default gateway IP address  
of the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.  
GatewayIPv4Address;  
%2 =  
CIM_StaticIPAssignmentSettingData.  
DefaultGatewayAddress;  
%3 = user ID)  
OS Watchdog response %1 by %2.  
(%1 = Enabled or Disabled; %2 =  
user ID)  
Info  
Info  
A user has enabled or  
disabled an OS Watchdog.  
No action; information only.  
DHCP[%1] failure, no IP address  
assigned.  
(%1 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
A DHCP server has failed to  
assign an IP address to the  
IMM.  
1. Make sure that the network  
cable is connected.  
2. Make sure that there is a  
DHCP server on the network  
that can assign an IP address  
to the IMM.  
Remote Login Successful. Login ID: Info  
%1 from %2 at IP address %3.  
(%1 = user ID; %2 =  
A user has successfully  
logged in to the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
ValueMap(CIM_ProtocolEndpoint.  
ProtocolIFType; %3 = IP address,  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
44 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Attempting to %1 server %2 by user Info  
%3.  
A user has used the IMM to No action; information only.  
perform a power function on  
(%1 = Power Up, Power Down,  
Power Cycle, or Reset; %2 =  
IBM_ComputerSystem.  
the server.  
ElementName; %3 = user ID)  
Security: Userid: ’%1’ had %2 login  
failures from WEB client at IP  
address %3.  
Error  
Error  
A user has exceeded the  
maximum number of  
unsuccessful login attempts  
1. Make sure that the correct  
login ID and password are  
being used.  
(%1 = user ID; %2 =  
from a Web browser and has  
2. Have the system  
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures  
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);  
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
been prevented from logging  
administrator reset the login  
in for the lockout period.  
ID or password.  
Security: Login ID: ’%1’ had %2  
login failures from CLI at %3.  
(%1 = user ID; %2 =  
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures  
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);  
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
A user has exceeded the  
maximum number of  
unsuccessful login attempts  
1. Make sure that the correct  
login ID and password are  
being used.  
from the command-line  
2. Have the system  
interface and has been  
administrator reset the login  
prevented from logging in  
ID or password.  
for the lockout period.  
Remote access attempt failed. Invalid Error  
userid or password received. Userid  
is ’%1’ from WEB browser at IP  
address %2.  
(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP address,  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
A user has attempted to log  
in from a Web browser by  
1. Make sure that the correct  
login ID and password are  
using an invalid login ID or  
being used.  
password.  
2. Have the system  
administrator reset the login  
ID or password.  
Remote access attempt failed. Invalid Error  
userid or password received. Userid  
is ’%1’ from TELNET client at IP  
address %2.  
(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP address,  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
A user has attempted to log  
in from a Telnet session by  
1. Make sure that the correct  
login ID and password are  
using an invalid login ID or  
being used.  
password.  
2. Have the system  
administrator reset the login  
ID or password.  
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on  
system %1 cleared by user %2.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName; %2 = user ID)  
Info  
A user has cleared the IMM No action; information only.  
event log.  
IMM reset was initiated by user %1. Info  
(%1 = user ID)  
A user has initiated a reset  
of the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
ENET[0] DHCP-HSTN=%1, DN=%2, Info  
IP@=%3, SN=%4, GW@=%5,  
DNS1@=%6.  
The DHCP server has  
assigned an IMM IP address  
and configuration.  
No action; information only.  
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.  
Hostname; %2 =  
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.  
DomainName; %3 =  
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.  
IPv4Address; %4 =  
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.  
SubnetMask; %5 = IP address,  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx; %6 = IP address,  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
ENET[0] IP-Cfg:HstName=%1,  
IP@%2, NetMsk=%3, GW@=%4.  
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.  
Hostname; %2 =  
Info  
An IMM IP address and  
configuration have been  
assigned using client data.  
No action; information only.  
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.  
IPv4Address; %3 =  
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.  
SubnetMask; %4 =  
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.  
DefaultGatewayAddress)  
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is no  
longer active.  
Info  
Info  
Info  
The IMM Ethernet interface No action; information only.  
has been disabled.  
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is now  
active.  
The IMM Ethernet interface No action; information only.  
has been enabled.  
DHCP setting changed to by user  
%1.  
A user has changed the  
DHCP mode.  
No action; information only.  
(%1 = user ID)  
IMM: Configuration %1 restored  
from a configuration file by user %2.  
(%1 = CIM_ConfigurationData.  
ConfigurationName; %2 = user ID)  
Info  
A user has restored the IMM No action; information only.  
configuration by importing a  
configuration file.  
Watchdog %1 Screen Capture  
Occurred.  
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader  
Watchdog)  
Error  
An operating-system error  
has occurred, and the screen  
capture was successful.  
1. Reconfigure the watchdog  
timer to a higher value.  
2. Make sure that the IMM  
Ethernet over USB interface is  
enabled.  
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or  
cdc_ether device driver for  
the operating system.  
4. Disable the watchdog.  
5. Check the integrity of the  
installed operating system.  
46 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Watchdog %1 Failed to Capture  
Screen.  
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader  
Watchdog)  
Error  
An operating-system error  
has occurred, and the screen  
capture failed.  
1. Reconfigure the watchdog  
timer to a higher value.  
2. Make sure that the IMM  
Ethernet over USB interface is  
enabled.  
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or  
cdc_ether device driver for  
the operating system.  
4. Disable the watchdog.  
5. Check the integrity of the  
installed operating system.  
6. Update the IMM firmware.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
Running the backup IMM main  
application.  
Error  
The IMM has resorted to  
running the backup main  
application.  
Update the IMM firmware.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a  
cluster solution, verify that the  
latest level of code is supported  
for the cluster solution before  
you update the code.  
Please ensure that the IMM is  
flashed with the correct firmware.  
The IMM is unable to match its  
firmware to the server.  
Error  
The server does not support Update the IMM firmware to a  
the installed IMM firmware version that the server supports.  
version.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a  
cluster solution, verify that the  
latest level of code is supported  
for the cluster solution before  
you update the code.  
IMM reset was caused by restoring  
default values.  
Info  
Info  
The IMM has been reset  
because a user has restored  
the configuration to its  
default settings.  
No action; information only.  
IMM clock has been set from NTP  
server %1.  
The IMM clock has been set No action; information only.  
to the date and time that is  
(%1 =  
provided by the Network  
IBM_NTPService.ElementName)  
Time Protocol server.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
SSL data in the IMM configuration  
data is invalid. Clearing  
configuration data region and  
disabling SSL+H25.  
Error  
There is a problem with the  
certificate that has been  
imported into the IMM. The  
imported certificate must  
contain a public key that  
corresponds to the key pair  
that was previously  
1. Make sure that the certificate  
that you are importing is  
correct.  
2. Try to import the certificate  
again.  
generated through the  
Generate a New Key and  
Certificate Signing Request  
link.  
Flash of %1 from %2 succeeded for  
user %3.  
(%1 = CIM_ManagedElement.  
ElementName;  
Info  
A user has successfully  
updated one of the  
following firmware  
components:  
No action; information only.  
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI;  
%3 = user ID)  
v IMM main application  
v IMM boot ROM  
v Server firmware  
v Diagnostics  
v Integrated service  
processor  
Flash of %1 from %2 failed for user Info  
%3.  
(%1 = CIM_ManagedElement.  
ElementName;  
An attempt to update a  
firmware component from  
the interface and IP address  
has failed.  
Try to update the firmware again.  
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI;  
%3 = user ID)  
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on  
system %1 is 75% full.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Info  
Info  
Error  
The IMM event log is 75%  
full. When the log is full,  
older log entries are replaced clear the log.  
by newer ones.  
To avoid losing older log entries,  
save the log as a text file and  
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on  
system %1 is 100% full.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
The IMM event log is full.  
When the log is full, older  
log entries are replaced by  
newer ones.  
To avoid losing older log entries,  
save the log as a text file and  
clear the log.  
%1 Platform Watchdog Timer  
expired for %2.  
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader  
Watchdog; %2 = OS Watchdog or  
Loader Watchdog)  
A Platform Watchdog Timer  
Expired event has occurred.  
1. Reconfigure the watchdog  
timer to a higher value.  
2. Make sure that the IMM  
Ethernet over USB interface is  
enabled.  
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or  
cdc_ether device driver for  
the operating system.  
4. Disable the watchdog.  
5. Check the integrity of the  
installed operating system.  
IMM Test Alert Generated by %1.  
(%1 = user ID)  
Info  
A user has generated a test  
alert from the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
48 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Security: Userid: ’%1’ had %2 login  
failures from an SSH client at IP  
address %3.  
Error  
A user has exceeded the  
maximum number of  
unsuccessful login attempts  
from SSH and has been  
prevented from logging in  
for the lockout period.  
1. Make sure that the correct  
login ID and password are  
being used.  
(%1 = user ID; %2 =  
2. Have the system  
administrator reset the login  
ID or password.  
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures  
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);  
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting tables  
Use the troubleshooting tables to find solutions to problems that have identifiable symptoms.  
If you have just added new software or a new optional device and the server is not working, do the  
following before using the troubleshooting tables:  
1. Check the system-error LED on the operator information panel to see if it is lit.  
2. Remove the software or device that you just added.  
3. Run the diagnostic tests to determine whether the server is running correctly.  
4. Reinstall the new software or new device.  
EasyStartup problems  
Table 3. EasyStartup DVD  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The EasyStartup DVD  
will not start.  
v Make sure the server supports the EasyStartup program and has a startable (bootable)  
DVD drive.  
v If the startup (boot) sequence settings have been changed, make sure the DVD drive is  
first in the startup sequence.  
v If more than one DVD drive is installed, make sure that only one drive is set as the  
primary drive. Start the EasyStartup DVD from the primary DVD drive.  
The operating-system  
installation program  
continuously loops.  
Make more space available on the hard disk.  
The EasyStartup  
program will not start  
the operating-system  
media.  
Make sure that the operating-system media is supported by the EasyStartup program.  
See the EasyStartup User Guide for a list of supported operating-system versions. The  
EasyStartup User Guide and compatibility notes are available through the EasyStartup  
program.  
50 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DVD drive problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The optical drive is not  
recognized.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The SATA connector to which the DVD drive is attached (primary or  
secondary) is enabled in the Setup utility.  
v All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.  
v The correct device driver is installed for the DVD drive.  
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.  
3. Reseat the following components:  
a. DVD drive  
b. DVD drive cable  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. DVD drive  
b. DVD drive interface board cable  
c. DVD interface board  
d. (Trained service technician only) System board  
A CD or DVD is not working  
correctly.  
1. Clean the CD or DVD.  
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.  
3. Check the connector and signal cable for bent pins or damage.  
4. Reseat the following components:  
a. DVD drive  
b. DVD drive cable  
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. DVD drive  
b. DVD drive cable  
The DVD drive tray is not  
working.  
1. Make sure that the server is turned on.  
2. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release  
opening.  
3. Reseat the DVD drive.  
4. Replace the DVD drive.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A cover lock is broken, an LED If the part is a CRU, replace it. If the part is a FRU, the part must be replaced by a  
is not working, or a similar  
problem has occurred.  
trained service technician.  
Hard disk drive problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A hard disk drive has failed,  
and the associated amber hard  
disk drive status LED is lit.  
Replace the failed hard disk drive (see “Replacing hard disk drives” on page 126).  
52 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A newly installed hard disk  
drive is not recognized.  
1. Observe the associated amber hard disk drive status LED. If the LED is lit, it  
indicates a drive fault.  
2. If the LED is lit, remove the drive from the bay, wait 45 seconds, and reinsert  
the drive, making sure that the drive assembly connects to the hard disk drive  
backplane.  
3. Observe the associated green hard disk drive activity LED and the amber  
status LED:  
v If the green activity LED is flashing and the amber status LED is not lit, the  
drive is recognized by the controller and is working correctly. Run the DSA  
hard disk drive test to determine whether the drive is detected.  
v If the green activity LED is flashing and the amber status LED is flashing  
slowly, the drive is recognized by the controller and is rebuilding.  
v If neither LED is lit or flashing, check the hard disk drive backplane (go to  
step 4).  
v If the green activity LED is flashing and the amber status LED is lit, replace  
the drive. If the activity of the LEDs remains the same, go to step 4. If the  
activity of the LEDs changes, return to step 1.  
4. Make sure that the hard disk drive backplane is correctly seated. When it is  
correctly seated, the drive assemblies correctly connect to the backplane  
without bowing or causing movement of the backplane.  
5. Reseat the backplane power cable and repeat steps 1 through 3.  
6. Reseat the backplane signal cable and repeat steps 1 through 3.  
7. Suspect the backplane signal cable or the backplane:  
v Replace the affected backplane signal cable.  
v Replace the affected backplane.  
8. Run the diagnostic tests for the SAS/SATA controller and hard disk drives (see  
“Diagnostic tools” on page 19).  
v If the controller passes the test but the drives are not recognized, replace the  
backplane signal cable and run the tests again.  
v Replace the backplane.  
v If the controller fails the test, disconnect the backplane signal cable from the  
controller and run the tests again.  
v If the controller fails the test, replace the controller.  
9. See “Problem determination tips” on page 104..  
Multiple hard disk drives fail.  
Make sure that the hard disk drive, SAS/SATA RAID controller, and server device  
drivers and firmware are at the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of  
code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.  
Multiple hard disk drives are  
offline.  
1. Review the storage subsystem logs for indications of problems within the  
storage subsystem, such as backplane or cable problems.  
2. See “Problem determination tips” on page 104.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A replacement hard disk drive  
does not rebuild.  
1. Make sure that the hard disk drive is recognized by the controller (the green  
hard disk drive activity LED is flashing).  
2. Review the SAS/SATA RAID controller documentation to determine the  
correct configuration parameters and settings.  
A green hard disk drive activity  
LED does not accurately  
represent the actual state of the  
associated drive.  
1. If the green hard disk drive activity LED does not flash when the drive is in  
use, run the DSA disk drive test (see “Diagnostic tools” on page 19.  
2. Use one of the following procedures:  
v If the drive passes the test, replace the backplane.  
v If the drive fails the test, replace the drive.  
An amber hard disk drive  
status LED does not accurately  
represent the actual state of the  
associated drive.  
1. If the amber hard disk drive LED and the RAID controller software do not  
indicate the same status for the drive, complete the following steps:  
a. Turn off the server.  
b. Reseat the SAS/SATA controller.  
c. Reseat the backplane signal cable and backplane power cable.  
d. Reseat the hard disk drive.  
e. Turn on the server and observe the activity of the hard disk drive LEDs.  
2. See “Problem determination tips” on page 104.  
Hypervisor problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
If an optional embedded  
1. Make sure that the optional embedded hypervisor flash device is selected on  
hypervisor flash device is not  
listed in the expected boot  
order, does not appear in the  
list of boot devices, or a similar  
problem has occurred.  
the boot manager (<F12> Select Boot Device) at startup.  
2. Make sure that the embedded hypervisor flash device is seated in the  
connector correctly (see “Replacing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device”  
on page 133.  
3. See the documentation that comes with the optional embedded hypervisor  
flash device for setup and configuration information.  
4. Make sure that other software works on the server.  
54 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Intermittent problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A problem occurs only  
occasionally and is difficult to  
diagnose.  
1. Make sure that:  
v All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the server and  
attached devices.  
v When the server is turned on, air is flowing from the fan grille. If there is no  
airflow, the fan is not working. This can cause the server to overheat and  
shut down.  
2. Check the system-error log or IMM system event log (see “POST” on page 21).  
The server resets (restarts)  
occasionally.  
1. If the reset occurs during POST and the POST watchdog timer is enabled (click  
System Settings --> Integrated Management Module --> POST Watchdog  
Timer in the UEFI Setup Utility program to see the POST watchdog setting),  
make sure that sufficient time is allowed in the watchdog timeout value  
(POST Watchdog Timer). If the server continues to reset during POST, see  
“POST” on page 21.  
2. If the reset occurs after the operating system starts, disable any automatic  
server restart (ASR) utilities or ASR devices that may be installed.  
Note: ASR utilities operate as operating-system utilities and are related to the  
IPMI device driver. If the reset continues to occur after the operating system  
starts, the operating system might have a problem; see “Software problems” on  
page 64.  
3. If neither condition applies, check the system-error log or IMM system event  
log (see “POST” on page 21).  
If the problem remains, call for service.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
All or some keys on the  
keyboard do not work.  
1. Make sure that the keyboard cable is securely connected.  
2. If you are using a USB keyboard and it is connected to a USB hub, disconnect  
the keyboard from the hub and connect it directly to the server.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Keyboard  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
The mouse or pointing device  
does not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected to the server.  
v The mouse or pointing-device device drivers are installed correctly.  
v The server and the monitor are turned on.  
v The mouse option is enabled in the Setup utility.  
2. If you are using a USB mouse or pointing device and it is connected to a USB  
hub, disconnect the mouse or pointing device from the hub and connect it  
directly to the server.  
3. Move the mouse or pointing device cable to another USB connector.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Mouse or pointing device  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
56 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Memory problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The amount of system memory  
that is displayed is less than the  
amount of installed physical  
memory.  
1. Make sure that:  
v No error LEDs are lit on the operator information panel.  
v The memory modules are seated correctly.  
v You have installed the correct type of memory.  
v All banks of memory are enabled. The server might have automatically  
disabled a memory bank when it detected a problem.  
2. Check the POST error log:  
v If a DIMM was disabled by a systems-management interrupt (SMI), replace  
the DIMM.  
3. Run memory diagnostics (see “Diagnostic tools” on page 19).  
4. Make sure that there is no memory mismatch when the server is at the  
minimum memory configuration.  
5. Add one pair of DIMMs at a time, making sure that the DIMMs in each pair  
match.  
6. Reseat the DIMM.  
7. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. DIMMs  
b. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board  
Multiple rows of DIMMs in a  
branch are identified as failing.  
1. Reseat the DIMMs; then, restart the server.  
2. Replace the failing DIMM.  
3. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Microprocessor problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A microprocessor LED is lit  
during POST, indicating that  
the microprocessor is not  
working correctly.  
1. Make sure that the server supports the microprocessor.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Make sure that the microprocessor is seated  
correctly.  
3. (Trained the service technician only) Reseat the microprocessor.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
58 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitor problems  
Some monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem with your monitor, see the  
documentation that comes with the monitor for instructions for testing and adjusting the monitor. If you  
cannot diagnose the problem, call for service.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
Testing the monitor.  
1. Make sure that the monitor cables are firmly connected.  
2. Try using a different monitor on the server, or try using the monitor that is  
being tested on a different server.  
3. Run the diagnostic programs. If the monitor passes the diagnostic programs,  
the problem might be a video device driver.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.  
The screen is blank.  
1. If the server is attached to a KVM switch, bypass the KVM switch to eliminate  
it as a possible cause of the problem: connect the monitor cable directly to the  
correct connector on the rear of the server.  
2. Make sure that:  
v The server is turned on. If there is no power to the server, see “Power  
problems” on page 62.  
v The monitor cables are connected correctly.  
v The monitor is turned on and the brightness and contrast controls are  
adjusted correctly.  
3. Make sure that the correct server is controlling the monitor, if applicable.  
4. Make sure that damaged server firmware is not affecting the video; see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
5. Observe the checkpoint LEDs on the system board; if the codes are changing,  
go to step 6.  
6. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Monitor  
b. Video PCI card (if one is installed)  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
7. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 103.  
The monitor works when you  
turn on the server, but the  
screen goes blank when you  
start some application  
programs.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The application program is not setting a display mode that is higher than  
the capability of the monitor.  
v You installed the necessary device drivers for the application.  
2. Run video diagnostics (see “Diagnostic tools” on page 19).  
v If the server passes the video diagnostics, the video is good; see “Solving  
undetermined problems” on page 103.  
v (Trained service technician only) If the server fails the video diagnostics,  
replace the system board.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The monitor has screen jitter, or  
the screen image is wavy,  
unreadable, rolling, or  
distorted.  
1. If the monitor self-tests show that the monitor is working correctly, consider  
the location of the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as  
transformers, appliances, fluorescents, and other monitors) can cause screen  
jitter or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this happens,  
turn off the monitor.  
Attention: Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might cause screen  
discoloration.  
Move the device and the monitor at least 305 mm (12 in.) apart, and turn on  
the monitor.  
Notes:  
a. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, make sure that the distance  
between the monitor and any external diskette drive is at least 76 mm (3  
in.).  
b. Non-Lenovo monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.  
2. Reseat the monitor cable.  
3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a time, in the order shown,  
restarting the server each time:  
a. Monitor cable  
b. Video PCI card (if one is installed)  
c. Monitor  
d. (Trained service technician only) System board  
Wrong characters appear on the  
screen.  
1. If the wrong language is displayed, update the UEFI code (see “Updating the  
firmware” on page 212) with the correct language.  
2. Reseat the monitor cable.  
3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a time, in the order shown,  
restarting the server each time:  
a. Monitor cable  
b. Monitor  
c. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.  
60 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional-device problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
An optional device that was  
just installed does not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The device is designed for the server.  
v You followed the installation instructions that came with the device and the  
device is installed correctly.  
v You have not loosened any other installed devices or cables.  
v You updated the configuration information in the Setup utility. Whenever  
memory or any other device is changed, you must update the configuration.  
2. Reseat the device that you just installed.  
3. Replace the device that you just installed.  
An optional device that worked  
previously does not work now.  
1. Make sure that all of the cable connections for the device are secure.  
2. If the device comes with test instructions, use those instructions to test the  
device.  
3. Reseat the failing device.  
4. Replace the failing device.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The power-control button does  
not work, and the reset button  
does work (the server does not  
start).  
1. Make sure that the power-control button is working correctly:  
a. Disconnect the server power cords.  
b. Reconnect the power cords.  
Note: The power-control button  
will not function until  
c. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the operator information panel  
cables, and then repeat steps 1a and 1b.  
approximately 1 to 3 minutes  
after the server has been  
connected to ac power.  
v (Trained service technician only) If the server starts, reseat the operator  
information panel. If the problem remains, replace the operator  
information panel.  
v If the server does not start, bypass the power-control button by using the  
force power-on jumper (see “System-board switches and jumpers” on  
page 111). If the server starts, reseat the operator information panel. If the  
problem remains, replace the operator information panel.  
2. Make sure that the reset button is working correctly:  
a. Disconnect the server power cords.  
b. Reconnect the power cords.  
3. Make sure that:  
v The power cords are correctly connected to the server and to a working  
electrical outlet.  
v The type of memory that is installed is correct.  
v The DIMMs are fully seated.  
v The LEDs on the power supply do not indicate a problem.  
v (Trained service technician only) The microprocessor is correctly installed.  
4. Reseat the following components:  
a. DIMMs  
b. (Trained service technician only) Power-supply cables to all internal  
components  
c. (Trained service technician only) Power switch connector  
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. DIMMs  
b. Power supply  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
6. If you just installed an optional device, remove it, and restart the server. If the  
server now starts, you might have installed more devices than the power  
supply supports.  
7. See “Power-supply LEDs” on page 67.  
8. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 103.  
62 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The server does not turn off.  
1. Determine whether you are using an Advanced Configuration and Power  
Interface (ACPI) or a non-ACPI operating system. If you are using a non-ACPI  
operating system, complete the following steps:  
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.  
b. Turn off the server by pressing the power-control button and hold it down  
for 5 seconds.  
c. Restart the server.  
d. If the server fails POST and the power-control button does not work,  
disconnect the ac power cord for 20 seconds; then, reconnect the ac power  
cord and restart the server.  
2. If the problem remains or if you are using an ACPI-aware operating system,  
suspect the system board.  
The server unexpectedly shuts  
down, and the LEDs on the  
operator information panel are  
not lit.  
See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 103.  
Serial-device problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The number of serial ports that  
are identified by the operating  
system is less than the number  
of installed serial ports.  
1. Make sure that:  
v Each port is assigned a unique address in the UEFI Setup Utility program  
and none of the serial ports is disabled.  
v The serial-port (if one is present) is seated correctly.  
2. Reseat the serial port PCI card.  
3. Replace the serial port PCI card.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A serial device does not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The device is compatible with the server.  
v The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.  
v The device is connected to the correct connector (see “System-board switches  
and jumpers” on page 111).  
2. Reseat the following components:  
a. Failing serial device  
b. Serial cable  
3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a time, in the order shown,  
restarting the server each time.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.  
Software problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
You suspect a software  
problem.  
1. To determine whether the problem is caused by the software, make sure that:  
v The server has the minimum memory that is needed to use the software. For  
memory requirements, see the information that comes with the software. If  
you have just installed an optional device or memory, the server might have  
a memory-address conflict.  
v The software is designed to operate on the server.  
v Other software works on the server.  
v The software works on another server.  
2. If you received any error messages when using the software, see the  
information that comes with the software for a description of the messages and  
suggested solutions to the problem.  
3. Contact the software vendor.  
64 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
Trained service technician.  
v Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A USB device does not work.  
1. Run USB diagnostics (see “POST” on page 21).  
2. Make sure that:  
v The correct USB device driver is installed.  
v The operating system supports USB devices.  
3. Make sure that the USB configuration options are set correctly in the Setup  
Utility (see “Using the Setup Utility” on page 200 for more information).  
4. If you are using a USB hub, disconnect the USB device from the hub and  
connect it directly to the server.  
Video problems  
See “Monitor problems” on page 59.  
Error LEDs  
The illustration shows the system-board LEDs. The system board has error LEDs that will help to locate  
the source of the error. Run the diagnostic programs to find out the cause of the error (see “Running the  
diagnostic programs” on page 69).  
New graphic to be added in the next draft.  
The server is designed so that LEDs remain lit when the server is connected to an ac power source but is  
not turned on, provided that the power supply is operating correctly. This feature helps you to isolate the  
problem when the operating system is shut down.  
Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the ability to view the LEDs  
because the LEDs are not lit when the power source is removed. Before you disconnect the power source,  
make a note of which LEDs are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operation information panel and  
LEDs inside the server on the system board.  
Many errors are first indicated by a lit system-error LED on the control-panel assembly of the server. If  
this LED is lit, one or more LEDs elsewhere in the server might also be lit and can direct you to the  
source of the error.  
Before you work inside the server to view the LEDs, read the safety information that begins on page 1.  
If an error occurs, view the server LEDs in the following order:  
1. Check the control-panel assembly on the front of the server. If the system-error LED is lit, it indicates  
that an error has occurred.  
2. Check the front and rear of the server to determine whether any component LEDs are lit.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Remove the server cover and look inside the server for lit LEDs. Certain components inside the server  
have LEDs that will be lit to indicate the location of a problem. For example, a DIMM error will light  
the LED next to the failing DIMM on the system board.  
Look at the system service label inside the side cover of the server, which gives an overview of  
internal components. This information can often provide enough information to correct the error.  
The following table describes the LEDs on the system board and PCI extender cards and suggested  
actions to correct the detected problems.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Component LED  
Description  
Action  
DIMM error LEDs  
A memory DIMM has failed or is  
incorrectly installed.  
1. Remove the DIMM that has the lit error LED.  
2. Reseat the DIMM.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. DIMM  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
CPU error LEDs  
Microprocessor has failed, is  
missing, or has been incorrectly  
installed.  
Note: (Trained service technician  
only) Make sure that the  
microprocessor is installed correctly;  
see “Installing the microprocessor”  
on page 141.  
1. Check the system-event log to determine the  
reason for the lit LED.  
2. (Trained service technician) Reseat the failing  
microprocessor  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. (Trained service technician only) Failing  
microprocessor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
System-board error  
LED  
System-board CPU VRD and/or  
power voltage regulators have  
failed.  
(Trained service technician only) Replace the system  
board.  
Battery failure LED  
Battery low.  
1. Replace the CMOS lithium battery, if necessary.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
IMM heartbeat LED  
Indicates the status of the boot  
process of the IMM.  
If the LED does not begin flashing within 30 seconds  
of when the server is connected to power, complete  
the following steps:  
When the server is connected to  
power this LED flashes quickly to  
indicate that the IMM code is  
loading. When the loading is  
complete, the LED stops flashing  
briefly and then flashes slowly to  
indicate that the IMM if fully  
operational and you can press the  
power-control button to start the  
server.  
1. (Trained service technician only) Rerecover the  
firmware (see “Recovering the server firmware”  
on page 100).  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
66 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
v See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Component LED  
Description  
Action  
PCI slots error LEDs  
An error has occurred on a PCI bus  
or on the system board. An  
additional LED is lit next to a  
failing PCI slot.  
1. Check the system-event log for information about  
the error.  
2. If you cannot isolate the failing adapter through  
the LEDs and the information in the system-event  
log, remove one adapter at a time, and restart the  
server after each adapter is removed.  
3. If the failure remains, go to http://  
www.lenovo.com/support for additional  
troubleshooting information.  
Enclosure manager  
heartbeat LED  
power-on and power-off  
sequencing.  
1. If the LED flashes at 1Hz, it is functioning  
properly and no action is necessary.  
2. If the LED is not flashing, (trained service  
technician only) replace the system board.  
Power-supply LEDs  
The following minimum configuration is required for the DC LED on the power supply to be lit:  
v Power supply  
v Power cord  
The following minimum configuration is required for the server to start:  
v One microprocessor in microprocessor socket 1  
v One 1 GB DIMM on the system board  
v One power supply  
v Power cord  
v ServeRAID SAS/SATA adapter  
v Five cooling fans  
The following illustration shows the locations of the power-supply LEDs.  
Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2  
activity LED link LED  
activity LED  
Power-cord  
connector  
Serial  
connector  
Ethernet 2  
link LED  
NMI button  
USB 3-4 connector  
USB 1-2 connector  
Video  
connector  
System pulse LEDs  
The following LEDs are on the system board and indicates the system power-on and power-off  
sequencing and boot progress (see “System-board LEDs” on page 112 for the location of these LEDs).  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 4. System pulse LEDs  
LED  
Description  
Action  
Enclosure manager heartbeat  
power-on and power-off sequencing.  
1. If the LED flashes at 1Hz, it is  
functioning properly and no  
action is necessary.  
2. If the LED is not flashing, (trained  
service technician only) replace  
the system board.  
IMM heartbeat  
IMM heartbeat boot process.  
The following steps describe the  
different stages of the IMM heartbeat  
sequencing process.  
1. When this LED is flashing fast  
(approximately 4Hz), the IMM  
code is in the loading process.  
2. When this LED goes off  
momentarily, this indicates that  
the IMM code has loaded  
completely.  
3. When this LED goes off  
momentarily and then starts  
flashing slowing (approximately  
1Hz), theIMM is fully operational.  
You can now press the  
power-control button to power-on  
the server.  
4. If this LED does not flash within  
30 seconds of connecting a power  
flash to the server, complete the  
following steps:  
a. (Trained service technician  
only) Use the IMM recovery  
jumper to recover the  
firmware (see Table 6 on page  
111).  
b. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Diagnostic programs and messages  
The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major components of the server. As you  
run the diagnostic programs, text messages are displayed on the screen and are saved in the test log. A  
diagnostic text message indicates that a problem has been detected and provides the action you should  
take as a result of the text message.  
Make sure that the server has the latest version of the diagnostic programs. To download the latest  
version, complete the following steps.  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual procedure might vary slightly  
from what is described in this document.  
Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
68 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Utilities are available to reset and update the diagnostics code on the integrated USB flash device, if the  
diagnostic partition becomes damaged and does not start the diagnostic programs. For more information  
and to download the utilities, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
Running the diagnostic programs  
To run the diagnostic programs, complete the following steps:  
1. If the server is running, turn off the server and all attached devices.  
2. Turn on all attached devices; then, turn on the server.  
3. When the prompt <F2> Diagnostics is displayed, press F2.  
Note: The DSA Preboot diagnostic program might appear to be unresponsive for an unusual length of  
time when you start the program. This is normal operation while the program loads.  
4. Optionally, select Quit to DSA to exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic program.  
Note: After you exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic environment, you must restart the  
server to access the stand-alone memory diagnostic environment again.  
5. Select gui to display the graphical user interface, or select cmd to display the DSA interactive menu.  
6. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the diagnostic test to run.  
If the diagnostic programs do not detect any hardware errors but the problem remains during normal  
server operation, a software error might be the cause. If you suspect a software problem, see the  
information that comes with your software.  
A single problem might cause more than one error message. When this happens, correct the cause of the  
first error message. The other error messages usually will not occur the next time you run the diagnostic  
programs.  
Exception: If multiple error codes or system-board LEDs indicate a microprocessor error, the error might  
be in a microprocessor or in a microprocessor socket. See “Microprocessor problems” on page 58 for  
information about diagnosing microprocessor problems.  
If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server and try running the  
diagnostic programs again. If the problem remains, replace the component that was being tested when  
the server stopped.  
Diagnostic text messages  
Diagnostic text messages are displayed while the tests are running. A diagnostic text message contains  
one of the following results:  
Passed: The test was completed without any errors.  
Failed: The test detected an error.  
Aborted: The test could not proceed because of the server configuration  
Additional information concerning test failures is available in the extended diagnostic results for each  
test.  
Viewing the test log  
To view the test log when the tests are completed, type the view command in the DSA interactive menu,  
or select Diagnostic Event Log in the graphical user interface. To transfer DSA Preboot collections to an  
external USB device, type the copy command in the DSA interactive menu.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostic messages  
The following table describes the messages that the diagnostic programs might generate and suggested  
actions to correct the detected problems. Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are  
listed in the column.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Aborted Internal  
program error.  
Description  
Action  
089-801-xxx  
CPU  
CPU Stress  
Test  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown  
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD  
section for this component. For more information,  
see “Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to  
recover from a hung state.  
7. Run the test again.  
8. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, and run this test again to  
determine whether the problem has been solved:  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor board  
b. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor  
9. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo support  
Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to  
check for technical information, hints, tips, and  
new device drivers or to submit a request for  
information.  
70 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
089-802-xxx  
CPU  
CPU Stress  
Test  
Aborted System  
resource  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
availability  
error.  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown  
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD  
section for this component. For the latest level of  
firmware, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support  
and select your system to display a matrix of  
available firmware.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to  
recover from a hung state.  
7. Run the test again.  
8. Make sure that the system firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown  
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD  
section for this component. For more information,  
see “Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
9. Run the test again.  
089-802-xxx  
CPU  
CPU Stress  
Test  
Aborted System  
resource  
1. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, and run this test again to  
determine whether the problem has been solved:  
availability  
error.  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor board  
b. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor  
2. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo support  
Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to  
check for technical information, hints, tips, and  
new device drivers or to submit a request for  
information.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
089-901-xxx  
CPU  
CPU Stress  
Test  
Failed  
Test failure.  
1. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to  
recover from a hung state.  
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown  
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD  
section for this component. For more information,  
see “Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to  
recover from a hung state.  
7. Run the test again.  
8. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, and run this test again to  
determine whether the problem has been solved:  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor board  
b. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor  
9. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-801-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped: the  
IMM returned  
an incorrect  
response  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
length.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
72 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-802-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
stopped: the  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
test cannot be  
completed for  
an unknown  
reason.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-803-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped: the  
node is busy;  
try later.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-804-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped:  
invalid  
command.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-805-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped:  
invalid  
command for  
the given LUN.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
74 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-806-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped:  
timeout while  
processing the  
command.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-807-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped: out of  
space.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-808-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped:  
reservation  
canceled or  
invalid  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
reservation ID.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-809-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped:  
request data  
was truncated.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
76 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-810-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped:  
request data  
length is  
invalid.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-811-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped:  
request data  
field length  
limit is  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
exceeded.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-812-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C Test  
stopped: a  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
parameter is  
out of range.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-813-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped: cannot  
return the  
number of  
requested data  
bytes.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
78 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-814-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped:  
requested  
sensor, data, or  
record is not  
present.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-815-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped:  
invalid data  
field in the  
request.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-816-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
stopped: the  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
command is  
illegal for the  
specified sensor  
or record type.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-817-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped: a  
command  
response could  
not be  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
provided.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
80 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-818-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped: cannot  
execute a  
duplicated  
request.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-819-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped: a  
command  
response could  
not be  
provided; the  
SDR repository  
is in update  
mode.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-820-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
stopped: a  
command  
response could  
not be  
provided; the  
device is in  
firmware  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code and IMM firmware  
update mode.  
are at the latest level.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-821-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
stopped: a  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
command  
response could  
not be  
provided; IMM  
initialization is  
in progress.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
82 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-822-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
stopped: the  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
destination is  
unavailable.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-823-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
stopped: cannot  
execute the  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
command;  
insufficient  
privilege level.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-824-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test  
stopped: cannot  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
execute the  
command.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-901-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Failed  
The IMM  
indicates a  
failure in the  
H8 bus (Bus 0)  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Remove power from the system.  
8. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
9. Reconnect the system to power and turn on the  
system.  
10. Run the test again.  
11. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-902-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Failed  
The IMM  
1. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
indicates a  
failure in the  
memory bus.  
84 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-903-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Failed  
The IMM  
indicates a  
failure in the  
DIMM bus (Bus  
2).  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Disconnect the system from the power source.  
8. Replace the DIMMs one at a time, and run the  
test again after replacing each DIMM.  
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
10. Run the test again.  
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
12. Reseat all of the DIMMs.  
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
14. Run the test again.  
15. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
16. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
17. Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
18. Run the test again.  
19. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-904-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Failed  
The IMM  
indicates a  
failure in the  
power supply  
bus (Bus 3).  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Reseat the power supply.  
8. Run the test again.  
9. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
10. Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
11. Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
12. Run the test again.  
13. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
86 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-905-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Failed  
The IMM  
indicates a  
failure in the  
HDD bus (Bus  
4).  
Note: Ignore the error if the hard disk drive  
backplane is not installed.  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
8. Reseat the hard disk drive backplane.  
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
10. Run the test again.  
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
12. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
14. Run the test again.  
15. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
166-906-xxx  
IMM  
IMM I2C Test Failed  
The IMM  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source. You must disconnect the system  
from ac power to reset the IMM.  
indicates a  
failure in the  
memory  
configuration  
bus (Bus 5).  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
8. Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
10. Run the test again.  
11. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
201-801-xxx  
Memory  
Memory Test Aborted Test canceled:  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
the system  
UEFI  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
programmed  
the memory  
controller with  
an invalid  
CBAR address  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
201-802-xxx  
Memory  
Memory Test Aborted Test canceled:  
the end address  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
in the E820  
3. Make sure that all DIMMs are enabled in the  
function is less  
than 16 MB.  
Setup utility.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
88 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
201-803-xxx  
201-804-xxx  
201-805-xxx  
201-806-xxx  
Memory  
Memory Test Aborted Test canceled:  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
could not  
enable the  
processor  
cache.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Memory  
Memory  
Memory  
Memory Test Aborted Test canceled:  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
the memory  
controller  
buffer request  
failed.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Memory Test Aborted Test canceled:  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
the memory  
controller  
display/alter  
write operation  
was not  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
completed.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Memory Test Aborted Test canceled:  
the memory  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
controller fast  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
scrub operation  
was not  
completed.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
201-807-xxx  
201-808-xxx  
201-809-xxx  
Memory  
Memory Test Aborted Test canceled:  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
the memory  
controller  
buffer free  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
request failed.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Memory  
Memory Test Aborted Test canceled:  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
memory  
2. Run the test again.  
controller  
display/alter  
buffer execute  
error.  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Memory  
Memory Test Aborted Test canceled  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
program error:  
operation  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
running fast  
scrub.  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
90 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
201-810-xxx  
Memory  
Memory Test Aborted Test stopped:  
unknown error  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
code xxx  
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
received in  
COMMONEXIT  
procedure.  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
201-901-xxx  
Memory  
Memory Test Failed  
Test failure:  
single-bit error,  
failing DIMM  
z.  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
2. Reseat DIMM z.  
3. Reconnect the system to power and turn on the  
system.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the server firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is  
shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Replace the failing DIMMs.  
8. Re-enable all memory in the Setup utility (see  
“Using the Setup Utility” on page 200).  
9. Run the test again.  
10. Replace the failing DIMM.  
11. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
201-902-xxx  
Memory  
Memory Test Failed  
Test failure:  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
single-bit and  
multi-bit error,  
failing DIMM z  
power source.  
2. Reseat DIMM z.  
3. Reconnect the system to power and turn on the  
system.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the server firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is  
shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 212.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Replace the failing DIMMs.  
8. Re-enable all memory in the Setup utility see  
“Using the Setup Utility” on page 200).  
9. Run the test again.  
10. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
202-801-xxx  
Memory  
Memory  
Stress Test  
Aborted Internal  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
program error.  
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in the  
DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section for  
this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to  
recover from a hung state.  
6. Run the memory diagnostics to identify the  
specific failing DIMM.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
92 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
202-802-xxx  
Memory  
Memory  
Stress Test  
Failed  
General error:  
memory size is  
insufficient to  
run the test.  
1. Make sure that all memory is enabled by checking  
the Available System Memory in the Resource  
Utilization section of the DSA event log. If  
necessary, enable all memory in the Setup utility  
(see “Using the Setup Utility” on page 200).  
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Run the standard memory test to validate all  
memory.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
202-901-xxx  
Memory  
Memory  
Stress Test  
Failed  
Test failure.  
1. Run the standard memory test to validate all  
memory.  
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest level.  
For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Turn off the system and disconnect it from power.  
4. Reseat the DIMMs.  
5. Reconnect the system to power and turn on the  
system.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Aborted Unable to  
communicate  
Description  
Action  
215-801-xxx  
DVD Drive  
v
Verify  
Media  
1. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
with the device  
driver.  
Installed  
v
v
Read/  
Write Test  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose or  
broken connections or damage to the cable.  
Replace the cable if it is damaged.  
Self-Test  
Messages  
4. Run the test again.  
and actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Make sure that the system firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is  
shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 212.  
8. Run the test again.  
9. Replace the DVD drive.  
10. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
215-802-xxx  
DVD Drive  
Aborted The media tray  
is open.  
v
Verify  
Media  
Installed  
1. Close the media tray and wait 15 seconds.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Insert a new CD/DVD into the drive and wait  
v
v
Read/  
Write Test  
for 15 seconds for the media to be recognized.  
4. Run the test again.  
Self-Test  
5. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose or  
broken connections or damage to the cable.  
Replace the cable if it is damaged.  
Messages  
and actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
8. Run the test again.  
9. For additional troubleshooting information, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
10. Run the test again.  
11. Replace the DVD drive.  
12. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
94 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
215-803-xxx  
DVD Drive  
Failed  
The disc might  
be in use by  
the system.  
v
Verify  
Media  
Installed  
1. Wait for the system activity to stop.  
2. Run the test again  
3. Turn off and restart the system.  
4. Run the test again.  
v
v
Read/  
Write Test  
5. Replace the DVD drive.  
Self-Test  
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Messages  
and actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
215-901-xxx  
DVD Drive  
Aborted Drive media is  
not detected.  
v
Verify  
Media  
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new  
media, and wait for 15 seconds.  
Installed  
2. Run the test again.  
v
v
Read/  
Write Test  
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose or  
broken connections or damage to the cable.  
Replace the cable if it is damaged.  
Self-Test  
4. Run the test again.  
Messages  
5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to  
and actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Replace the DVD drive.  
8. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
215-902-xxx  
DVD Drive  
Failed  
Read  
miscompare.  
v
Verify  
Media  
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new  
media, and wait for 15 seconds.  
Installed  
2. Run the test again.  
v
v
Read/  
Write Test  
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose or  
broken connections or damage to the cable.  
Replace the cable if it is damaged.  
Self-Test  
4. Run the test again.  
Messages  
5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to  
and actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Replace the DVD drive.  
8. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
215-903-xxx  
DVD Drive  
Aborted Could not  
access the  
v
Verify  
Media  
Installed  
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new  
media, and wait for 15 seconds.  
drive.  
2. Run the test again.  
v
v
Read/  
Write Test  
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose or  
broken connections or damage to the cable.  
Replace the cable if it is damaged.  
Self-Test  
4. Run the test again.  
Messages  
5. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
and actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. For additional troubleshooting information, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
8. Run the test again.  
9. Replace the DVD drive.  
10. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
215-904-xxx  
DVD Drive  
Failed  
A read error  
occurred.  
v
Verify  
Media  
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new  
media, and wait for 15 seconds.  
Installed  
2. Run the test again.  
v
v
Read/  
Write Test  
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose or  
broken connections or damage to the cable.  
Replace the cable if it is damaged.  
Self-Test  
4. Run the test again.  
Messages  
5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to  
and actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Replace the DVD drive.  
8. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
217-901-xxx  
SAS/SATA  
Hard Drive  
Disk Drive  
Test  
Failed  
1. Reseat all hard disk drive backplane connections  
at both ends.  
2. Reseat all drives.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest level.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
96 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
405-901-xxx  
405-901-xxx  
405-902-xxx  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
Test Control  
Registers  
Failed  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown  
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD  
section for this component. For more information,  
see “Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Replace the component that is causing the error. If  
the error is caused by an adapter, replace the  
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network  
Settings information in the DSA event log to  
determine the physical location of the failing  
component.  
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
Test MII  
Registers  
Failed  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown  
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD  
section for this component. For more information,  
see “Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Replace the component that is causing the error. If  
the error is caused by an adapter, replace the  
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network  
Settings information in the DSA event log to  
determine the physical location of the failing  
component.  
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
Test  
EEPROM  
Failed  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown  
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD  
section for this component. For more information,  
see “Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Replace the component that is causing the error. If  
the error is caused by an adapter, replace the  
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network  
Settings information in the DSA event log to  
determine the physical location of the failing  
component.  
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
405-903-xxx  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
Test Internal Failed  
Memory  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown  
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD  
section for this component. For more information,  
see “Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the PCI  
Hardware section of the DSA event log. If the  
Ethernet device is sharing interrupts, if possible,  
use the Setup utility see “Using the Setup Utility”  
on page 200) to assign a unique interrupt to the  
device.  
4. Replace the component that is causing the error. If  
the error is caused by an adapter, replace the  
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network  
Settings information in the DSA event log to  
determine the physical location of the failing  
component.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
405-904-xxx  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
Test Interrupt Failed  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown  
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD  
section for this component. For more information,  
see “Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the PCI  
Hardware section of the DSA event log. If the  
Ethernet device is sharing interrupts, if possible,  
use the Setup utility see “Using the Setup Utility”  
on page 200) to assign a unique interrupt to the  
device.  
4. Replace the component that is causing the error. If  
the error is caused by an adapter, replace the  
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network  
Settings information in the DSA event log to  
determine the physical location of the failing  
component.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
98 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.  
See Chapter 7, “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534,” on page 177 to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
v
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained service  
technician.  
Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component  
Test  
State  
Description  
Action  
405-906-xxx  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
Test Loop  
back at  
Physical  
Layer  
Failed  
1. Check the Ethernet cable for damage and make  
sure that the cable type and connection are  
correct.  
2. Make sure that the component firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown  
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD  
section for this component. For more information,  
see “Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Replace the component that is causing the error. If  
the error is caused by an adapter, replace the  
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network  
Settings information in the DSA event log to  
determine the physical location of the failing  
component.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
405-907-xxx  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
Test Loop  
back at  
MAC-Layer  
Failed  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown  
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD  
section for this component. For more information,  
see “Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Replace the component that is causing the error. If  
the error is caused by an adapter, replace the  
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network  
Settings information in the DSA event log to  
determine the physical location of the failing  
component.  
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
405-908-xxx  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
Test LEDs  
Failed  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the  
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown  
in the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD  
section for this component. For more information,  
see “Updating the firmware” on page 212.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Replace the component that is causing the error. If  
the error is caused by an adapter, replace the  
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network  
Settings information in the DSA event log to  
determine the physical location of the failing  
component.  
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recovering the server firmware  
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code updates. If the device  
is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code is supported for the cluster solution before  
you update the code.  
If the server firmware has become corrupted, such as from a power failure during an update, you can  
recover the server firmware in one of two ways:  
v In-band method: Recover server firmware, using either the boot block jumper (Automated Boot  
Recovery) and a server Firmware Update Package Service Pack.  
v Out-of-band method: Use the IMM Web Interface to update the firmware, using the latest server  
firmware update package.  
Note: You can obtain a server update package from one of the following sources:  
v Download the server firmware update from the World Wide Web.  
v Contact your Lenovo service representative.  
To download the server firmware update package from the World Wide Web, go to http://  
www.lenovo.com/support.  
The flash memory of the server consists of a primary bank and a backup bank. It is essential that you  
maintain the backup bank with a bootable firmware image. If the primary bank becomes corrupted, you  
can either manually boot the backup bank with the boot block jumper, or in the case of image corruption,  
this will occur automatically with the Automated Boot Recovery function.  
In-band manual recovery method  
To recover the server firmware and restore the server operation to the primary bank, complete the  
following steps:  
1. Turn off the server, and disconnect all power cords and external cables.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119 for more information.  
3. Locate the UEFI boot recovery jumper block (JP6) on the system board.  
100 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Boot block  
jumper (JP6)  
Clear CMOS  
jumper (JP1)  
4. Move the jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 to enable the UEFI recovery mode.  
5. Reinstall the server cover; then, reconnect all power cords.  
6. Restart the server. The power-on self-test (POST) starts.  
7. Boot the server to an operating system that is supported by the firmware update package that you  
downloaded.  
8. Perform the firmware update by following the instructions that are in the firmware update package  
readme file.  
9. Copy the downloaded firmware update package into a directory.  
10. From a command line, type filename-s, where filename is the name of the executable file that you  
downloaded with the firmware update package.  
11. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables, and then remove the server  
cover.  
12. Move the UEFI boot recovery jumper back to the primary position (pins 1 and 2).  
13. Reinstall the server cover, and then reconnect all the power cables.  
14. Restart the server.  
In-band automated boot recovery method  
Note: Use this method if the system board error LED is lit and there is a log entry or Booting Backup  
Image is displayed on the firmware splash screen; otherwise, use the in-band manual recovery method.  
1. Boot the server to an operating system that is supported by the firmware update package that you  
downloaded.  
2. Perform the firmware update by following the instructions that are in the firmware update package  
readme file.  
3. Restart the server.  
4. At the firmware splash screen, press F3 when you are prompted to restore to the primary bank. The  
server boots from the primary bank.  
Out-of-band method: See the IMM documentation.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automated boot recovery (ABR)  
If the server is booting up and the IMM detect problems with the server firmware in the primary bank, it  
will automatically switch to the backup firmware bank and give you the opportunity to recover the  
primary bank. To recover to the server firmware primary bank, complete the following steps.  
1. Restart the server.  
2. When the prompt press F3 to restore to primary is displayed, press F3 to recover the primary bank.  
Pressing F3 will restart the server.  
Three boot failure  
Configuration changes, such as added devices or adapter firmware updates can cause the server to fail  
POST (power-on self-test). If this occurs on three consecutive boot attempts, the server will temporarily  
use the default configuration values and automatically goes to F1 Setup. To solve the problem, complete  
the following steps:  
1. Undo any configuration changes that you made recently and restart the server.  
2. Remove any devices that you added recently and restart the server.  
3. If the problem remains, go to Setup and select Load Default Settings, and then click Save to restore  
the server factory settings.  
Solving power problems  
Power problems can be difficult to solve. For example, a short circuit can exist anywhere on any of the  
power distribution buses. Usually, a short circuit will cause the power subsystem to shut down because  
of an overcurrent condition. To diagnose a power problem, use the following general procedure:  
1. Turn off the server and disconnect all ac power cords.  
2. Check the power-fault LEDs on the system board (see “Power problems” on page 62).  
3. Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for example, if a loose  
screw is causing a short circuit on a circuit board.  
4. Remove the adapters and disconnect the cables and power cords to all internal and external devices  
until the server is at the minimum configuration that is required for the server to start (see “Solving  
undetermined problems” on page 103 for the minimum configuration).  
5. Reconnect all ac power cords and turn on the server. If the server starts successfully, reseat the  
adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is isolated.  
If the server does not start from the minimum configuration, see “Power-supply LEDs” on page 67 to  
replace the components in the minimum configuration one at a time until the problem is isolated.  
Solving Ethernet controller problems  
The method that you use to test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating system you are  
using. See the operating-system documentation for information about Ethernet controllers, and see the  
Ethernet controller device-driver readme file.  
Try the following procedures:  
v Make sure that the correct device drivers, which come with the server are installed and that they are at  
the latest level.  
v Make sure that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly.  
– The cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is attached but the problem  
remains, try a different cable.  
– If you set the Ethernet controller to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use Category 5 cabling.  
102 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– If you directly connect two servers (without a hub), or if you are not using a hub with X ports, use  
a crossover cable. To determine whether a hub has an X port, check the port label. If the label  
contains an X, the hub has an X port.  
v Determine whether the hub supports auto-negotiation. If it does not, try configuring the integrated  
Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and duplex mode of the hub.  
v Check the Ethernet controller LEDs on the rear panel of the server. These LEDs indicate whether there  
is a problem with the connector, cable, or hub.  
– The Ethernet link status LED is lit when the Ethernet controller receives a link pulse from the hub. If  
the LED is off, there might be a defective connector or cable or a problem with the hub.  
– The Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED is lit when the Ethernet controller sends or receives data  
over the Ethernet network. If the Ethernet transmit/receive activity is off, make sure that the hub  
and network are operating and that the correct device drivers are installed.  
v Check the LAN activity LED on the rear of the server. The LAN activity LED is lit when data is active  
on the Ethernet network. If the LAN activity LED is off, make sure that the hub and network are  
operating and that the correct device drivers are installed.  
v Check for operating-system-specific causes of the problem.  
v Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same protocol.  
If the Ethernet controller still cannot connect to the network but the hardware appears to be working, the  
network administrator must investigate other possible causes of the error.  
Solving undetermined problems  
If the diagnostic tests did not diagnose the failure or if the server is inoperative, use the information in  
this section.  
If you suspect that a software problem is causing failures (continuous or intermittent), see “Software  
problems” on page 64.  
Damaged data in CMOS memory or damaged server firmware can cause undetermined problems. To  
reset the CMOS data, use the CMOS jumper to clear the CMOS memory and override the power-on  
password; see “System-board switches and jumpers” on page 111. If you suspect that the server firmware  
is damaged, see “Recovering the server firmware” on page 100.  
If the power supplies are working correctly, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn off the server.  
2. Make sure that the server is cabled correctly.  
3. Remove or disconnect the following devices, one at a time, until you find the failure. Turn on the  
server and reconfigure it each time.  
v Any external devices.  
v Surge-suppressor device (on the server).  
v Printer, mouse, and non-Lenovo devices.  
v Each adapter.  
v Hard disk drives.  
v Memory modules. The minimum configuration requirement is 1 GB DIMM in slots 3.  
4. Turn on the server. If the problem remains, suspect the following components in the following order:  
v Memory module  
v Microprocessor  
v System board  
If the problem is solved when you remove an adapter from the server but the problem recurs when you  
reinstall the same adapter, suspect the adapter; if the problem recurs when you replace the adapter with a  
different one, suspect the riser card.  
If you suspect a networking problem and the server passes all the system tests, suspect a network cabling  
problem that is external to the server.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Problem determination tips  
Because of the variety of hardware and software combinations that can encounter, use the following  
information to assist you in problem determination. If possible, have this information available when  
requesting assistance from Lenovo.  
The model number and serial number of the server are located on an ID label ꢀ1ꢁ on the bezel.  
v Machine type and model  
v Microprocessor or hard disk drive upgrades  
v Failure symptom  
– Does the server fail the diagnostic tests?  
– What occurs? When? Where?  
– Does the failure occur on a single server or on multiple servers?  
– Is the failure repeatable?  
– Has this configuration ever worked?  
– What changes, if any, were made before the configuration failed?  
– Is this the original reported failure?  
v Diagnostic program type and version level  
v Hardware configuration (print screen of the system summary)  
v IMM firmware level  
v Operating system software  
You can solve some problems by comparing the configuration and software setups between working and  
nonworking servers. When you compare servers to each other for diagnostic purposes, consider them  
identical only if all the following factors are exactly the same in all the servers:  
v Machine type and model  
v IMM firmware level  
v Adapters and attachments, in the same locations  
v Address jumpers, terminators, and cabling  
v Software versions and levels  
v Diagnostic program type and version level  
v Configuration option settings  
v Operating-system control-file setup  
104 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5. Locating Server Controls and connectors  
This section describes the controls, light-emitting diodes (LEDs), and connectors on the front and rear of  
the server, and how to turn the server on and off. For the location of the LEDs on the system board, see  
“System-board LEDs” on page 112.  
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your model.  
Front view  
The following illustration shows the controls, LEDs, and connectors The following illustration shows the  
controls, LEDs, and connectors on the front of the various models of the server.  
3.5-inch simple-swap SAS server model  
3.5-inch hot-swap SAS/SATA server model  
2.5-inch hot-swap SAS server model  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Power-on LED  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
System-error LED  
USB 1 connector  
USB 2 connector  
Power-control button  
Reset button  
Hard disk drive activity LED  
Hard disk drive activity LED (green) (on 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS  
server model) Hard disk drive status LED (amber) (on 2.5-inch  
hot-swap SAS server model)  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
Locator LED  
ꢀ10ꢁ  
Hard disk drive status LED (amber) (on 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS  
server model) Hard disk drive activity LED (green) (on 2.5-inch  
hot-swap SAS server model)  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2007, 2009.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
 
Rear view  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
Power-cord connector  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
NMI button  
Serial connector  
Ethernet 1 activity LED  
Ethernet 1 link LED  
Ethernet 2 activity LED  
Ethernet 2 link LED  
PCI slot 1  
ꢀ10ꢁ  
ꢀ11ꢁ  
ꢀ12ꢁ  
ꢀ13ꢁ  
ꢀ14ꢁ  
ꢀ15ꢁ  
USB 3-4 connector  
USB 1-2 connector  
Video connector  
Power supply error LED (amber)  
DC power LED (green)  
AC power LED (green)  
PCI slot 2  
106 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System-board internal connectors  
The following illustration shows the internal connectors on the system board.  
ꢀ1ꢁ DIMM 1  
ꢀ11ꢁ Fan 1 connector  
ꢀ21ꢁ Riser-card connector 2  
ꢀ2ꢁ DIMM 2  
ꢀ12ꢁ Hard disk backplane configuration ꢀ22ꢁ Riser-card connector 1  
connector  
ꢀ3ꢁ DIMM 3  
ꢀ13ꢁ Operator information panel  
ꢀ23ꢁ Battery  
connector  
ꢀ4ꢁ DIMM 4  
ꢀ14ꢁ Simple-swap HDD backplane  
ꢀ24ꢁ Power 2 connector  
signal connector  
ꢀ5ꢁ DIMM 5  
ꢀ15ꢁ Wake-on-LAN connector  
ꢀ16ꢁ DVD drive connector  
ꢀ17ꢁ Hypervisor flash device connector  
ꢀ18ꢁ Reserved  
ꢀ25ꢁ Virtual media key connector  
ꢀ26ꢁ Power 1 connector  
ꢀ27ꢁ Power 3 connector  
ꢀ28ꢁ Power 4 connector  
ꢀ29ꢁ Fan 5 connector  
ꢀ6ꢁ DIMM 6  
ꢀ7ꢁ Microprocessor  
ꢀ8ꢁ Fan 3 connector  
ꢀ9ꢁ Fan 2 connector  
ꢀ19ꢁ Reserved  
ꢀ10ꢁ ServeRAD-BR10il  
ꢀ20ꢁ Reserved  
ꢀ30ꢁ Fan 4 connector  
controller connector  
Chapter 5. Locating Server Controls and connectors 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System-board external connectors  
The following illustration shows the external connectors on the system-board.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Serial (com 1) connector  
Video connector  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
Ethernet connector 2  
USB connectors 3 and 4  
SW1 (NMI button)  
Ethernet connector 1  
USB connectors 1 and 2  
108 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System-board optional-device connectors  
The following illustration shows the connectors on the system board for user-installable optional devices.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
DIMM 1  
DIMM 2  
DIMM 3  
DIMM 4  
DIMM 5  
DIMM 6  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
DVD drive connector  
Hypervisor flash device connector  
Riser-card connector 2  
Riser-card connector 1  
Battery  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
ꢀ10ꢁ  
ꢀ11ꢁ  
ꢀ12ꢁ  
ꢀ13ꢁ  
Virtual media key connector  
ServeRAID BR10il SAS/SATA  
controller connector  
The following illustration shows the locations of the PCI Express slots on the riser-card assembly.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
PCI Express x8 slot 1  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
PCI Express x8 slot 2  
Chapter 5. Locating Server Controls and connectors 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following illustration shows the location of the PCI-X slot on the optional PCI-X riser-card assembly.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
PCI-X power cable  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
PCI-X slot  
110 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System-board switches and jumpers  
The following illustration shows the switches and jumpers on the system board.  
The following table describes the jumpers on the system board.  
Table 6. System board jumpers  
Jumper number  
Jumper name  
Jumper setting  
JP1  
Clear CMOS jumper ꢀ1ꢁ  
v Pins 1 and 2: Keep CMOS data  
(default).  
v Pins 2 and 3: Clear CMOS data  
(including power-on password and  
administrator password)  
JP6  
Boot block jumper ꢀ2ꢁ  
v Pins 1 and 2: Boot from primary  
BIOS page (default) .  
v Pins 2 and 3: Boot from backup  
BIOS page.  
Notes:  
1. If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1 and 2.  
2. Changing the position of the UEFI boot recovery jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 before the server is  
turned on alters which flash ROM page is loaded. Do not change the jumper pin position after the server is  
turned on. This can cause an unpredictable problem.  
Important:  
1. Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn off the server; then, disconnect all  
power cords and external cables. Review the information in “Guidelines for trained service  
technicians” on page 115, “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 117, and “Turning off the  
server” on page 113.  
2. Any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in the illustrations in this document  
are reserved.  
Chapter 5. Locating Server Controls and connectors 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System-board LEDs  
The following illustration shows the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the system board.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
Fan 5 error LED  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
PCI Express slot 2 error LED  
PCI Express slot 1 error LED  
Microprocessor error LED  
Battery error LED  
Fan 4 error LED  
ꢀ10ꢁ  
ꢀ11ꢁ  
ꢀ12ꢁ  
ꢀ13ꢁ  
ꢀ14ꢁ  
ꢀ15ꢁ  
H8 Heartbeat LED  
Fan 3 error LED  
Fan 2 error LED  
Standby power LED  
Fan 1 error LED  
System board error LED  
DIMM 1-6 error LEDs  
SAS/SATA Controller LED  
IMM heart beat LED  
Table 7. System-board LEDs  
LED  
Description  
Error LEDs  
When one of these LEDs is lit, it indicates that the associated component has  
failed.  
Baseboard management controller  
heartbeat LED  
This LED flashes to indicate that the IMM is functioning normally.  
Standby power LED  
When this LED is lit, it indicates that the server is connected to ac power.  
112 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Server power features  
When the server is connected to an ac power source but is not turned on, the operating system does not  
run, and all core logic except for the service processor (the integrated management module) is shut down;  
however, the server can respond to requests to the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on  
the server. The power-on LED flashes to indicate that the server is connected to ac power but is not  
turned on.  
Turning on the server  
Approximately 5 seconds after the server is connected to ac power, one or more fans might start running  
to provide cooling while the server is connected to power and the power-on button LED flashes quickly.  
Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the power-control button  
becomes active (the power-on LED flashes slowly), and one or more fans might start running to provide  
cooling while the server is connected to power. You can turn on the server by pressing the power-control  
button.  
The server can also be turned on in any of the following ways:  
v If a power failure occurs while the server is turned on, the server will restart automatically when  
power is restored.  
v If your operating system supports the Wake on LAN feature, the Wake on LAN feature can turn on the  
server.  
Note: When 4 GB or more of memory (physical or logical) is installed, some memory is reserved for  
various system resources and is unavailable to the operating system. The amount of memory that is  
reserved for system resources depends on the operating system, the configuration of the server, and the  
configured PCI devices.  
Turning off the server  
When you turn off the server and leave it connected to ac power, the server can respond to requests to  
the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on the server. While the server remains connected  
to ac power, one or more fans might continue to run. To remove all power from the server, you must  
disconnect it from the power source.  
Some operating systems require an orderly shutdown before you turn off the server. See your  
operating-system documentation for information about shutting down the operating system.  
Chapter 5. Locating Server Controls and connectors 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power supply do not turn off the  
electrical current supplied to the device. The device also might have more than one power cord. To  
remove all electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the  
power source.  
2
1
The server can be turned off in any of the following ways:  
v You can turn off the server from the operating system, if your operating system supports this feature.  
After an orderly shutdown of the operating system, the server will turn off automatically.  
v You can press the power-control button to start an orderly shutdown of the operating system and turn  
off the server, if your operating system supports this feature.  
v If the operating system stops functioning, you can press and hold the power-control button for more  
than 4 seconds to turn off the server.  
v The server can be turned off by the Shutdown on LAN feature.  
v The integrated management module (IMM) can turn off the server as an automatic response to a  
critical system failure.  
114 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs  
Guidelines for trained service technicians  
This section contains information for trained service technicians.  
Inspecting for unsafe conditions  
Use the information in this section to help you identify potential unsafe conditions in a Lenovo product  
that you are working on. Each Lenovo product, as it was designed and manufactured, has required safety  
items to protect users and service technicians from injury. The information in this section addresses only  
those items. Use good judgment to identify potential unsafe conditions that might be caused by  
non-Lenovo alterations or attachment of non-Lenovo features or options that are not addressed in this  
section. If you identify an unsafe condition, you must determine how serious the hazard is and whether  
you must correct the problem before you work on the product.  
Consider the following conditions and the safety hazards that they present:  
v Electrical hazards, especially primary power. Primary voltage on the frame can cause serious or fatal  
electrical shock.  
v Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or a bulging capacitor.  
v Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing hardware.  
To inspect the product for potential unsafe conditions, complete the following steps:  
1. Make sure that the power is off and the power cord is disconnected.  
2. Make sure that the exterior cover is not damaged, loose, or broken, and observe any sharp edges.  
3. Check the power cord:  
v Make sure that the third-wire ground connector is in good condition. Use a meter to measure  
third-wire ground continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between the external ground pin and the frame  
ground.  
v Make sure that the power cord is the correct type.  
v Make sure that the insulation is not frayed or worn.  
4. Remove the cover.  
5. Check for any obvious non-Lenovo alterations. Use good judgment as to the safety of any non-Lenovo  
alterations.  
6. Check inside the server for any obvious unsafe conditions, such as metal filings, contamination, water  
or other liquid, or signs of fire or smoke damage.  
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.  
8. Make sure that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws or rivets) have not been removed or  
tampered with.  
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment  
Observe the following guidelines when servicing electrical equipment:  
v Check the area for electrical hazards such as moist floors, nongrounded power extension cords, power  
surges, and missing safety grounds.  
v Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some hand tools have handles that are covered with a  
soft material that does not provide insulation from live electrical currents.  
v Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational condition. Do not use  
worn or broken tools or testers.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2007, 2009.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
 
v Do not touch the reflective surface of a dental mirror to a live electrical circuit. The surface is  
conductive and can cause personal injury or equipment damage if it touches a live electrical circuit.  
v Some rubber floor mats contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic discharge. Do not use  
this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.  
v Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has hazardous voltages.  
v Locate the emergency power-off (EPO) switch, disconnecting switch, or electrical outlet so that you can  
turn off the power quickly in the event of an electrical accident.  
v Disconnect all power before you perform a mechanical inspection, work near power supplies, or  
remove or install main units.  
v Before you work on the equipment, disconnect the power cord. If you cannot disconnect the power  
cord, have the customer power-off the wall box that supplies power to the equipment and lock the  
wall box in the off position.  
v Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. Check it to make sure that it has been  
disconnected.  
v If you have to work on equipment that has exposed electrical circuits, observe the following  
precautions:  
– Make sure that another person who is familiar with the power-off controls is near you and is  
available to turn off the power if necessary.  
– When you are working with powered-on electrical equipment, use only one hand. Keep the other  
hand in your pocket or behind your back to avoid creating a complete circuit that could cause an  
electrical shock.  
– When you use a tester, set the controls correctly and use the approved probe leads and accessories  
for that tester.  
– Stand on a suitable rubber mat to insulate you from grounds such as metal floor strips and  
equipment frames.  
v Use extreme care when you measure high voltages.  
v To ensure proper grounding of components such as power supplies, pumps, blowers, fans, and motor  
generators, do not service these components outside of their normal operating locations.  
v If an electrical accident occurs, use caution, turn off the power, and send another person to get medical  
aid.  
Working inside the server with the power on  
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when the server is powered-on  
might cause the server to halt, which might result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem,  
always use an electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work inside the  
server with the power on.  
You might be instructed to turn on the server while the cover is off, to look at system-board LEDs.  
Follow these guidelines when you work inside a server that is turned on:  
v Avoid wearing loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts before working  
inside the server; do not wear cuff links while you are working inside the server.  
v Do not allow your necktie or scarf to hang inside the server.  
v Remove jewelry, such as bracelets, necklaces, rings, and loose-fitting wrist watches.  
v Remove items from your shirt pocket, such as pens and pencils, that could fall into the server as you  
lean over it.  
v Avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hairpins, and screws, into the server.  
116 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Handling static-sensitive devices  
Attention: Static electricity can damage the server and other electronic devices. To avoid damage, keep  
static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages until you are ready to install them.  
To reduce the possibility of damage from electrostatic discharge, observe the following precautions:  
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you.  
v The use of a grounding system is recommended. For example, wear an electrostatic-discharge wrist  
strap, if one is available.  
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.  
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed circuitry.  
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.  
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted metal part of the  
server for at least 2 seconds. This drains static electricity from the package and from your body.  
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the server without setting down the  
device. If it is necessary to set down the device, put it back into its static-protective package. Do not  
place the device on the server cover or on a metal surface.  
v Take additional care when you handle devices during cold weather. Heating reduces indoor humidity  
and increases static electricity.  
This chapter provides detailed instructions for replacing FRUs in the server.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Major components of the server  
The following illustrations show the major components in the server. The illustrations in this document  
might differ slightly from your hardware.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
Riser card assembly  
DIMM air baffle  
DIMM  
Power supply  
SAS/SATA backplane (some models)  
SATA simple-swap back panel (some models)  
3.5-inch drive cage  
3.5-inch simple-swap SATA hard disk drive (some  
models)  
ꢀ12ꢁ  
ꢀ13ꢁ  
ꢀ14ꢁ  
ꢀ15ꢁ  
ꢀ16ꢁ  
ꢀ17ꢁ  
ꢀ18ꢁ  
ꢀ19ꢁ  
Bezel  
DVD drive filler  
Operator information panel  
Fans  
System board  
Microprocessor  
Heat sink  
Cover  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
Simple-swap SATA filler  
ꢀ10ꢁ  
ꢀ11ꢁ  
Hot-swap hard disk drive filler  
3.5-inch or 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive  
(depending on model)  
118 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing and installing the cover  
Use the following procedures to remove and install the cover:  
Removing the cover  
To remove the server cover, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and all external cables, if  
necessary.  
Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you will lose the ability to view the  
LEDs because the LEDs will not be lit with the power source removed. Before disconnecting the  
power source, make sure to note which LEDs are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operator  
information panel and LEDs that are lit inside the server on the system board.  
3. If the server has been installed in a rack, slide the server out from the rack enclosure. See the Rack  
Installation Instructions that come with the server for information about removing the server from the  
rack.  
4. Press down firmly on the two blue tabs ꢀ1ꢁ on each side of the top of the cover and slide the cover  
toward the rear of the server until the cover has disengaged from the chassis.  
5. Lift the server cover off the server and set it aside.  
Installing the cover  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before you turn on the server.  
To replace the server cover, do the following:  
1. Align the cover over the server (toward the rear of the server) until the cover edges slip in position  
over the chassis.  
2. Press down on the two blue tabs on the front of the cover, while sliding the cover forward toward the  
front of the server until the cover is completely closed.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing and installing the bezel  
To remove the bezel, complete the following steps:  
1. Remove the server from the rack and remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
2. From inside the server, press the bezel release latch ꢀ1ꢁ toward the left side of the server.  
3. Pivot the bezel ꢀ2ꢁ forward and pull it away from the server.  
4. If you are instructed to return the bezel, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging  
materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
120 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the bezel and server cover before you turn on the  
server.  
To install the bezel, insert the tab at the right end of the bezel into the front of the chassis and pivot the  
bezel until it snaps into place.  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before you turn on the server.  
Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle  
The DIMM air baffle must be removed to allow access to some of the server components. To remove and  
install the DIMM air baffle, complete the following procedures:  
Removing the DIMM air baffle  
To remove the DIMM air baffle, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords and external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
4. Lift the DIMM air baffle ꢀ1ꢁ up and out of the server.  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, reinstall the DIMM air baffle before you turn on the  
server. Operating the server with the air baffle removed might damage server components.  
Installing the DIMM air baffle  
To install the DIMM air baffle, complete the following steps:  
1. Align the DIMM air baffle ꢀ1ꢁ as shown above.  
2. Lower the DIMM air baffle into position until it clicks into place.  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, the air baffle must be installed before turning on the  
server. Operating the server with an air baffle removed might damage server components.  
3. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacing a memory module (DIMM)  
To replace a dual inline memory module (DIMM), use the following information and procedures:  
Supported memory types  
Following is information that describes the types of dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) that the  
server supports and other information that you must consider when you install DIMMs (see  
“System-board internal connectors” on page 107 for the location of the DIMM connectors).  
v The server supports only industry-standard double-data-rate 3 (DDR3), 1066 or 1333 MHz, PC3-6400,  
PC3-8500, or PC3-10600 (single-rank, dual-rank, or quad-rank), registered or unbuffered, synchronous  
dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) with error  
correcting code (ECC). See http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver for a list of supported memory  
modules for the server.  
– The specifications of a DDR3 DIMM are on a label on the DIMM, in the following format.  
ggg eRxff-PC3-wwwwwm-aa-bb-cc  
where:  
ggg is the total capacity of the DIMM (for example, 1GB, 2GB, or 4GB)  
e is the number of ranks  
1 = single-rank  
2 = dual-rank  
4 = quad-rank  
ff is the device organization (bit width)  
4 = x4 organization (4 DQ lines per SDRAM)  
8 = x8 organization  
16 = x16 organization  
wwwww is the DIMM bandwidth, in MBps  
6400 = 6.40 GBps (PC3-800 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
8500 = 8.53 GBps (PC3-1066 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
10600 = 10.66 GBps (PC3-1333 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
12800 = 12.80 GBps PC3-1600 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
m is the DIMM type  
E = Unbuffered DIMM (UDIMM) with ECC (x72-bit module data bus)  
R = Registered DIMM (RDIMM)  
U = Unbuffered DIMM with no ECC (x64-bit primary data bus)  
aa is the CAS latency, in clocks at maximum operating frequency  
bb is the JEDEC SPD Revision Encoding and Additions level  
cc is the reference design file for the design of the DIMM  
d is the revision number of the reference design of the DIMM  
v The server supports unbuffered DIMMs (UDIMM) or registered DIMMs (RDIMM).  
v The server supports a maximum of six single-rank or dual-rank DIMMs, depending on the type of  
DIMM you install in the server.  
Note: To determine the type of a DIMM, see the label on the DIMM. The information on the label is in  
the format xxxxx nRxxx PC3-xxxxx-xx-xx-xxx. The numeral in the sixth numerical position indicates  
whether the DIMM is single-rank (n=1) or dual-rank (n=2).  
v The server supports up to two UDIMMs or three RDIMMs per channel. The following table shows an  
example of the maximum amount of memory that you can install, using ranked DIMMs.  
122 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unbuffered DIMMs (UDIMMs)  
The following notes provide information that you must configure when you install UDIMMs:  
v The memory channels run at the fastest common frequency of the DIMMs installed.  
v Do not use both UDIMMs and RDIMMs in the same server.  
v Using ECC and non-ECC UDIMMs in the server will cause the server to run in non-ECC mode.  
v The UDIMM options that are available for the server are 1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB (when available)  
DIMMs.  
v You can install a maximum of 16 GB of memory in some server models when you use UDIMMs.  
v The server supports up to two single-rank or dual-rank UDIMMs per channel.  
v DIMM slots 3 and 6 are not supported when you install UDIMMs in the server. Do not install DIMMs  
in these connectors.  
v The following table lists the supported UDIMM population.  
Table 8. Supported UDIMM population per channel  
DIMM connectors  
per channel  
DIMMs installed in  
each channel  
Ranks per DIMM  
(any combination)  
DIMM type  
DIMM speed  
2
1
Unbuffered DDR3  
ECC  
1066, 1333  
Single-rank,  
dual-rank  
2
2
Unbuffered DDR3  
ECC  
1066, 1333  
Single-rank,  
dual-rank  
v The following table lists the maximum DIMM population using ranked UDIMMs.  
Table 9. Maximum memory population using ranked UDIMMs (depending on your model)  
Number of UDIMMs  
DIMM type  
Size  
Total memory  
4
4
4
4
Single-rank UDIMMs  
Single-rank UDIMMs  
Dual-rank UDIMMs  
Dual-rank UDIMMs  
1 GB  
4 GB  
8 GB  
8 GB  
16 GB  
2 GB  
2 GB  
4 GB (when available)  
v The following table shows the UDIMM memory population rule to optimize the system performance.  
Table 10. UDIMM population rule for dual-channel symmetric mode  
DIMM connector DIMM connector DIMM connector DIMM connector DIMM connector DIMM connector  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Populated  
Populated  
Populated  
Empty  
Empty  
Populated  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Populated  
Populated  
Empty  
Empty  
Populated  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Registered DIMMs (RDIMMs)  
The following notes provide information that you must consider when you install RDIMMs:  
v The memory channels run at the fastest common frequency of the installed DIMMs.  
v RDIMMs are supported in models with an Xeon 3400 series processor.  
v Do not use both RDIMMs and UDIMMs in the same server.  
v The server supports up to three single-rank, dual-rank, or quad-rank RDIMMs per channel.  
v The RDIMM options that are available for the server are 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8 GB (when available)  
DIMMs.  
v You can install a maximum of 32 GB of memory in the server when you use RDIMMs.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v The following table lists the supported RDIMM population.  
Table 11. Supported RDIMM population per channel  
DIMM connectors  
per channel  
DIMMs installed in  
each channel  
Ranks per DIMM  
(any combination)  
DIMM type  
DIMM speed  
3
3
3
3
3
1
2
3
1
2
Registered DDR3  
ECC  
1066, 1333  
Single-rank,  
dual-rank  
Registered DDR3  
ECC  
1066, 1333  
800  
Single-rank,  
dual-rank  
Registered DDR3  
ECC  
Single-rank,  
dual-rank  
Registered DDR3  
ECC  
1066  
Quad-rank  
Registered DDR3  
ECC  
800  
Quad-rank  
v The following table lists the maximum DIMM population using ranked RDIMMs.  
Table 12. Maximum memory population using ranked RDIMMs (depending on your model)  
Number of RDIMMs  
DIMM type  
Size  
Total memory  
6
6
6
4
4
6
4
Single-rank RDIMMs  
Single-rank RDIMMs  
Dual-rank RDIMMs  
Dual-rank RDIMMs  
Quad-rank RDIMMs  
Dual-rank RDIMMs  
Quad-rank RDIMMs  
1 GB  
6 GB  
2 GB  
12 GB  
12 GB  
16 GB  
16 GB  
24 GB  
32 GB  
2 GB  
4 GB  
4 GB  
4 GB  
8 GB (when available)  
v The following table shows the RDIMM memory population rule to optimize the system performance.  
Table 13. RDIMM population rule for dual-channel symmetric mode  
DIMM connector DIMM connector DIMM connector DIMM connector DIMM connector DIMM connector  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Populated  
Populated  
Populated  
Populated  
Empty  
Empty  
Populated  
Populated  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Populated  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Populated  
Populated  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Populated  
Populated  
Populated  
Populated  
Note: The amount of usable memory is reduced, depending on the system configuration. A certain  
amount of memory must be reserved for system resources. To view the total amount of installed  
memory and the amount of configured memory, run the Setup utility.  
Removing a memory module  
To remove a DIMM, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and all external cables, if  
necessary.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
124 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attention: To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30 minutes  
with the cover removed.  
4. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
5. Carefully open the retaining clips ꢀ2ꢁ on each end of the DIMM connector and remove the DIMM ꢀ1ꢁ  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM connectors, open and close  
the clips gently.  
6. If you are instructed to return the DIMM, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging  
materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a memory module  
v The maximum operating speed of the server is determined by the slowest DIMM in the server.  
v If you install a pair of DIMMs in DIMM connectors 2 and 5, the size and speed of the DIMMs that you  
install in DIMM connectors 2 and 5 must match each other. How ever, they do not have to be the same  
size and speed as the DIMMs that are installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 4.  
v You can use compatible DIMMs from various manufacturers in the same pair.  
v When you install or remove DIMMs, the server configuration information changes. When you restart  
the server, the system displays a message that indicates that the memory configuration has changed.  
See “System-board internal connectors” on page 107 for the location of the DIMM connectors on the  
system board.  
To install a DIMM, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and all external cables, if  
necessary.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
5. Open the retaining clip ꢀ2ꢁ on each end of the DIMM connector.  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM connectors, open and close  
the clips gently.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DIMM to any unpainted metal surface on the  
outside of the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the package.  
7. Turn the DIMM ꢀ1ꢁ so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector (see “System-board  
internal connectors” on page 107 for the locations of the DIMM connectors).  
8. Insert the DIMM into the connector by aligning the edges of the DIMM with the slots at the ends of  
the DIMM connector .  
9. Firmly press the DIMM straight down into the connector by applying pressure on both ends of the  
DIMM simultaneously. The retaining clips ꢀ2ꢁ snap into the locked position when the DIMM is  
firmly seated in the connector.  
Note: If there is a gap between the DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM has not been correctly  
inserted; open the retaining clips, remove the DIMM, and then reinsert it.  
10. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Replacing hard disk drives  
Locate the documentation that comes with the hard disk drive and first follow those instructions.  
Determine if you are working with a simple-swap or a hot-swap hard disk drive.  
To replace a hard disk drive, complete the appropriate procedures for your drive:  
Attention: To avoid damage to the hard disk drive connectors, make sure that the server cover is in  
place and fully closed whenever you install or remove a hard disk drive.  
Note: If a RAID controller or PCI card is installed, you might have to reconfigure the disk arrays after  
you install or remove hard disk drives. See the documentation that comes with the PCI card for more  
information.  
Removing a simple-swap Serial ATA (SATA) hard disk drive  
Attention: Simple-swap hard disk drives are not hot-swappable. Disconnect all power from the server  
before you remove or install a simple-swap hard disk drive.  
To remove a simple-swap SATA drive from the bay, complete the following steps.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
126 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Make sure that the server cover is in place and fully closed.  
3. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
4. Remove the filler panel ꢀ2ꢁ from the bay.  
5. Pull the loops of the drive tray toward each other and pull the tray ꢀ3ꢁ out of the bay.  
Installing a simple-swap Serial ATA (SATA) hard disk drive  
Attention: Simple-swap hard disk drives are not hot-swappable. Disconnect all power from the server  
before you remove or install a simple-swap hard disk drive.  
To install a simple-swap SATA hard disk drive, complete the following steps.  
Note: If your server has only one simple-swap hard disk drive, make sure it is installed in the left drive  
bay.  
Attention: To avoid damage to the hard disk drive connectors, make sure that the server cover is in  
place and fully closed whenever you install or remove a hard disk drive.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Make sure that the server cover is in place and fully closed.  
3. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
4. Remove the filler panel ꢀ2ꢁ from the bay if necessary.  
5. Pull the loops of the drive tray toward each other, and slide the drive ꢀ3ꢁ into the server until the  
drive connects to the back plate ꢀ1ꢁ.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Release the loops of the drive tray.  
7. Insert the filler panel into the bay to cover the drive.  
Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation using a RAID controller, you might have to  
reconfigure your disk arrays after you install hard disk drives. See the RAID controller documentation  
for additional information about RAID operation and complete instructions for using the RAID  
controller.  
8. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Removing a hot-swap hard disk drive  
The 3.5-inch drive hot-swap server models support either two SAS 3.5-inch hard disk drives or two SATA  
3.5-inch hard disk drives. The 2.5-inch drive hot-swap server models support four 2.5-inch SAS hard disk  
drives.  
The removal and installation procedures are the same for any of these drives. The illustrations in this  
procedure show 3.5-inch SAS drives.  
To remove a hot-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps.  
Attention: To avoid damage to the hard disk drive connectors, make sure that the server cover is in  
place and fully closed whenever you install or remove a hard disk drive.  
1. Move the handle ꢀ1ꢁ on the drive to the open position (perpendicular to the drive).  
2. Slide the release latch (gray on 3.5-inch hard drives and orange on 2.5-inch hard drives) gently to the  
left to unlock the drive handle.  
128 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Grasp the handle and pull the hot-swap drive assembly ꢀ2ꢁ out of the drive bay.  
Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive  
To install a hot-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps.  
Note: If your server has only one hot-swap hard disk drive, install it in the left or upper-left drive bay.  
Attention: To avoid damage to the hard disk drive connectors, make sure that the server cover is in  
place and fully closed whenever you install or remove a hard disk drive.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Make sure that the server cover is in place and fully closed.  
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more than 10 minutes  
without either a drive or filler panel installed in each bay.  
3. Remove the filler panel from the empty drive bay if necessary.  
4. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted metal surface on the  
server. Then, remove the drive from the static-protective package and place it on a static-protective  
surface.  
5. Install the hard disk drive in the hot-swap bay:  
a. Make sure that the tray handle is open (that is, perpendicular to the front of the drive).  
b. Align the drive assembly ꢀ3ꢁ with the guide rails in the bay.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
c. Gently push the drive assembly into the bay until the drive stops.  
d. Push the tray handle ꢀ2ꢁ to the closed (locked) position.  
e. Check the hard disk drive status LED to make sure that the hard disk drive is operating correctly.  
If the amber hard disk drive status LED for a drive is lit continuously, that drive is faulty and  
must be replaced. If the green hard disk drive activity LED is flashing, the drive is being accessed.  
Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation using a RAID controller, you might have to  
reconfigure your disk arrays after you install hard disk drives. See the RAID controller documentation  
for additional information about RAID operation and complete instructions for using the RAID  
controller.  
6. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Replacing a PCI card  
To replace a PCI card, use the following procedures:  
Removing a PCI card  
To remove a PCI card, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
4. Disconnect any cables from the PCI card.  
5. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on page 157).  
6. If the riser-card assembly is an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly, disconnect the riser-card power  
cable from the riser-card assembly.  
130 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
PCI-X power cable  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
PCI-X slot  
7. Grasp the riser-card assembly at the front grip point and rear edges and lift to remove it from the  
server.  
8. Place the riser-card assembly on a flat, static-protective surface.  
9. Carefully grasp the PCI card by its top edge or upper corners, and pull the PCI card from the  
riser-card assembly.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Expansion-slot cover  
Expansion slot 2  
Expansion slot 1  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
PCI card  
Guide channels  
Riser-card assembly  
PCI card  
Expansion-slot cover  
10. If you are instructed to return the PCI card, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging  
materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
11. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing a PCI card  
To install a PCI card, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and all external cables;  
then, remove the server cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
3. If you have installed an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly ꢀ2ꢁ, disconnect the riser-card power  
cable ꢀ1ꢁ from the riser-card assembly.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Expansion-slot cover  
Expansion slot 2  
Expansion slot 1  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
PCI card  
Guide channels  
Riser-card assembly  
PCI card  
Expansion-slot cover  
4. Grasp the riser card at the front grip point and rear edges; then, lift to remove the riser-card  
assembly. Place the riser-card assembly ꢀ7ꢁ on a flat, static-protective surface.  
5. Remove the expansion-slot cover on the slot that you intend to use.  
Attention: PCI expansion-slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots. This maintains the  
electronic emissions characteristics of the server and ensures proper cooling of server components.  
132 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Follow the instructions that come with the PCI card to set any jumpers or switches.  
Attention: When you install an PCI card, make sure that it is completely and correctly seated in the  
expansion slot in the riser card. Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the riser card, system  
board, or the PCI card when you turn on the server.  
7. Insert the PCI card ꢀ5ꢁ into the riser-card assembly, aligning the edge connector on the PCI card  
with the connector on the riser-card assembly. Press the edge of the connector firmly into the  
riser-card assembly. Make sure that the PCI card snaps into the riser-card assembly securely.  
Important: Make sure that the U-shaped opening in the metal PCI card bracket ꢀ4ꢁ engages the tab  
ꢀ2ꢁ on the expansion-slot bracket ꢀ1ꢁ.  
Attention: When you install an PCI card, make sure that the PCI card is correctly seated in the  
riser-card assembly and that the riser-card assembly is securely seated in the riser-card connector on  
the system board before you turn on the server. An incorrectly seated PCI card might cause damage  
to the system board, the riser-card assembly, or the PCI card.  
8. Reinstall the riser-card assembly in the server (see “Installing the riser-card assembly” on page 158).  
9. If you have installed a PCI-X riser-card assembly ꢀ2ꢁ in the server, reconnect the riser-card power  
cable ꢀ2ꢁ to the riser-card assembly.  
10. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Replacing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device  
To replace a hypervisor flash device, complete the following procedures:  
Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device  
To remove a hypervisor flash device, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on page 157).  
5. Unlock the retention latch on the USB connector by squeezing the two retention clips toward each  
other (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 107.  
6. Grasp the flash device and pull to remove it from the connector.  
7. Press down on the retention latch to return it to the locked position.  
8. If you are instructed to return the flash device, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device  
To install a hypervisor flash device, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on page 157) (see  
“System-board internal connectors” on page 107.  
5. Unlock the retention latch on the USB connector by squeezing the two retention clips toward each  
other (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 107.  
6. Align the flash device with the USB connector on the system board and push it into the USB  
connector until it is firmly seated.  
7. Press down on the retention latch to lock the flash device into the USB connector.  
8. Install the riser-card assembly (see “Installing the riser-card assembly” on page 158).  
9. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Replacing the operator information panel assembly  
To replace the operator information panel assembly, use the following procedures:  
Removing the operator information panel assembly  
To remove the operator information panel assembly, complete the following steps.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
4. Disconnect both cables from the operator information panel assembly.  
5. Remove the screws that secure the operator information panel assembly to the DVD bay housing.  
134 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Lift the operator information panel assembly out of the server.  
7. If you are instructed to return the operator information panel assembly, follow all packaging  
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the operator information panel assembly  
To install the replacement operator information panel assembly, complete the following steps:  
1. Guide the operator information panel assembly into position on top of the DVD bay housing. Make  
sure that the LEDs and the USB connectors are aligned with the openings in the bezel and that the  
holes in the board align with the screw holes in the top of the bay housing.  
2. Use the screws that you removed earlier to secure the operator information panel assembly onto the  
top of the DVD bay housing.  
3. Reconnect both cables to the operator information panel assembly.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Operator information panel assembly  
Front panel USB connector  
Operator information panel connector  
4. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacing the drive cage  
To replace the drive cage, use the following procedures:  
Removing the drive cage  
The following illustration shows removing a simple-swap 3.5-inch drive cage.  
The following illustration shows removing a hot-swap 3.5-inch drive cage.  
The following illustration shows removing a hot-swap 2.5-inch drive cage.  
136 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To remove a drive cage, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
3. Remove the hard disk drives from the cage (see “Replacing hard disk drives” on page 126.  
4. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
Attention: To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30 minutes  
with the cover removed.  
5. Remove the hard disk drive backplane or back plate:  
v 2.5-inch drive models: Remove the hard disk drive backplane from the cage. See “Replacing the  
SAS/SATA hard disk drive back plate or backplane” on page 154 for instructions.  
v 3.5-inch drive models: Remove the hard disk drive backplane or back plate from the cage. See  
“Replacing the SAS/SATA hard disk drive back plate or backplane” on page 154 for instructions.  
6. Remove the screws that hold the drive cage in place.  
7. Slide the drive cage forward and remove it from the server.  
8. If you are instructed to return the drive cage, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the drive cage  
The following illustration shows installing a simple-swap 3.5-inch drive cage.  
The following illustration shows installing a hot-swap 3.5-inch drive cage.  
The following illustration shows installing a hot-swap 2.5-inch drive cage.  
138 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To install a drive cage, complete the following steps:  
1. Make sure that the backplane or back plate is removed from the drive cage. (See “Removing the  
backplane or back plate (3.5-inch drives)” on page 154 or “Removing the SAS backplane (2.5-inch  
drives)” on page 156 for instructions, as applicable.)  
2. Line up the drive cage with the drive bays on the front of the server.  
3. Push the drive cage into the server until it stops.  
4. Align the holes in the top of the drive cage with the holes in the top of the chassis; then, insert the  
screws that secure the drive cage to the chassis.  
5. Install the backplane or back plate. (See “Installing the backplane or back plate (3.5-inch drives)” on  
page 154 or “Installing the SAS backplane (2.5-inch drives)” on page 157 for instructions, as  
applicable.)  
6. Install the hard disk drives.  
7. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Replacing the microprocessor and heat sink  
The following notes describe the type of microprocessor that the server supports and other information  
that you must consider when you install a microprocessor:  
v The server supports one Intel land grid array (LGA) 1156 dual-core or quad-core microprocessor. The  
type, speed, and L3 cache of the microprocessor depends on the server model.  
v Read the documentation that comes with the microprocessor to determine whether you have to update  
the server firmware. To download the most current level of server firmware, go to  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
v The microprocessor uses an integrated voltage regulator on the system board.  
Removing the microprocessor  
To remove the microprocessor, complete the following steps.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack; then, remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover”  
on page 119).  
4. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
5. Remove the heat sink.  
CAUTION:  
The heat sink may become very hot during normal operation. Allow time for the heat sink to cool  
down before you touch it.  
a. Loosen the screw on one side of the heat sink to break the seal with the microprocessor.  
b. Press firmly on the captive screws and loosen them with a screwdriver.  
c. Use your fingers to gently pull the heat sink from the microprocessor.  
6. Lift the heat sink out of the server. After removal, place the heat sink on its side on a clean, flat  
surface.  
7. Release the microprocessor retention latch ꢀ2ꢁ by pressing down on the end, moving it to the side,  
and releasing it to the open (up) position.  
8. Open the microprocessor bracket frame ꢀ3ꢁ by lifting up the tab on the top edge. Keep the bracket  
frame in the open position.  
Attention: Handle the microprocessor carefully. Dropping the microprocessor during removal can  
damage the contacts. Also, contaminants on the microprocessor contacts, such as oil from your skin,  
can cause connection failures between the contacts and the socket.  
140 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Remove the microprocessor:  
a. Carefully lift the microprocessor ꢀ1ꢁ straight up and out of the socket, without touching the  
microprocessor contacts.  
b. Place the microprocessor on a static-protective surface  
10. If you are instructed to return the microprocessor, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the microprocessor  
The following notes describe the type of microprocessor that the server supports and other information  
that you must consider when you install a microprocessor and heat sink:  
v If you have to replace a microprocessor, call for service.  
v Read the documentation that comes with the microprocessor, so that you can determine whether you  
have to update the server firmware. To download the latest level of server firmware and other code  
updates for your server, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
v The microprocessor speeds are automatically set for this server; therefore, you do not have to set any  
microprocessor frequency-selection jumpers or switches.  
v If the thermal-grease protective cover (for example, a plastic cap or tape liner) is removed from the  
heat sink, do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of the heat sink or set down the heat sink.  
For more information about applying or working with thermal grease, see “Thermal grease” on page  
143.  
Note: Removing the heat sink from the microprocessor destroys the even distribution of the thermal  
grease and requires replacing the thermal grease.  
To install the replacement microprocessor, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Make sure that the microprocessor bracket frame and release latch are both fully open.  
Attention:  
v When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to avoid damage from static electricity.  
For details about handling these devices, see “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 117.  
v The microprocessor contacts are fragile; handle the microprocessor very carefully. Do not touch the  
microprocessor contacts with your skin.  
v The microprocessor fits only one way on the socket.  
3. Align the microprocessor ꢀ1ꢁ with the socket (note the alignment mark ꢀ2ꢁ and the position of the  
notches); then, carefully place the microprocessor on the socket, close the microprocessor bracket  
frame ꢀ4ꢁ, and close the microprocessor release latch ꢀ3ꢁ.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Gently lower the heat sink on the microprocessor.  
5. Install the heat sink on the microprocessor.  
Attention: Do not touch the thermal material on the bottom of the heat sink. Touching the thermal  
material will contaminate it. If the thermal material on the microprocessor or heat sink becomes  
contaminated, contact your service technician.  
a. Make sure that the thermal material is still on the bottom of the heat sink; then, align the heat sink  
so that the arrows on the label point toward the DIMMs and place the heat sink on top of the  
microprocessor, thermal material side down.  
b. Align the screw holes ꢀ1ꢁ on the heat sink with the holes on the system board ꢀ3ꢁ Following is an  
illustration of the heat sink orientation.  
Heatsink  
Orientation  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
c. Tighten the screws with a screwdriver, alternating among the screws until they are tight. If  
possible, each screw should be rotated two full rotations at a time. Repeat until the screws are  
tight. Do not overtighten the screws by using excessive force.  
142 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Thermal grease  
The thermal grease must be replaced whenever the heat sink has been removed from the top of the  
microprocessor and is going to be reused or when debris is found in the grease.  
When you are installing the heat sink on the same microprocessor that is was removed from, make sure  
that the following requirements are met:  
v The thermal grease on the heat sink and microprocessor is not contaminated.  
v Additional thermal grease is not added to the existing thermal grease on the heat sink and  
microprocessor.  
Note:  
1. Read the safety information at “Important Safety Information” on page 1.  
2. Read “Guidelines for trained service technicians” on page 115.  
3. Read “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 117.  
To replace damaged or contaminated thermal grease on the microprocessor and heat sink, complete the  
following steps:  
1. Place the heat sink on a clean work surface.  
2. Remove the cleaning pad from its package and unfold it completely.  
3. Use the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the bottom of the heat sink.  
Note: Make sure that all of the thermal grease is removed.  
4. Use a clean area of the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the microprocessor; then,  
dispose of the cleaning pad after all of the thermal grease is removed.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Use the thermal-grease syringe to place 9 uniformly spaced dots ꢀ1ꢁ of 0.02 mL each on the top of the  
microprocessor ꢀ2ꢁ. Make sure that the outermost dots are within 5 mm of the edge, to ensure even  
distribution.  
Note: 0.01mL is one tick mark on the syringe. If the grease is properly applied, approximately half  
(0.22 mL) of the grease will remain in the syringe.  
6. Install the heat sink onto the microprocessor as described in “Installing the microprocessor” on page  
141.  
Replacing the system board  
To replace the system board, use the following procedures:  
Removing the system board  
Note: When you replace the system board, you must either update the server with the latest firmware or  
restore the pre-existing firmware that the customer provides on a diskette or CD image. Make sure that  
you have the latest firmware or a copy of the pre-existing firmware before you proceed.  
To remove the system board, complete the following steps  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and any attached devices.  
3. Turn off the peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then, remove the cover (see  
“Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
Note: When you replace the system board, you must either update the server with the latest  
firmware or restore the pre-existing firmware that the customer provides on a diskette or CD image.  
Make sure that you have the latest firmware or a copy of the pre-existing firmware before you  
proceed.  
4. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on page 157).  
5. Remove the IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller if one is installed (see “Removing an IBM  
ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller” on page 159).  
6. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
7. Remove the heat sink and microprocessor, and set them aside on a static-protective surface for  
reinstallation (see “Removing the microprocessor” on page 140).  
144 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Remove the memory modules and set them aside on a static-protective surface for reinstallation (see  
“Replacing a memory module (DIMM)” on page 122).  
Note: Make a note of the location of each DIMM as you remove it, so that you can later reinstall it  
in the same connector.  
9. Remove the virtual media key from the system board and set it aside (see “Replacing the virtual  
media key” on page 167). You must reinstall the virtual media key on the new system board.  
10. Remove the hypervisor flash device from the USB connector on the system board and set it aside  
(see “Replacing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device” on page 133). You must reinstall the  
hypervisor flash device on the new system board.  
11. Disconnect all cables from the system board. Make a list of each cable as you disconnect it; you can  
then use this as a checklist when you install the new system board.  
12. Remove the screws ꢀ1ꢁ that secure the system board to the chassis, and put them in a safe place.  
13. Lift up the system board and carefully remove it from the server, being careful not to damage any  
surrounding components.  
14. If you are instructed to return the system board, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the system board  
Note: When you reassemble the components in the server, be sure to route all cables carefully so that  
they are not exposed to excessive pressure.  
Notes:  
1. When you reassemble the components in the server, be sure to route all cables carefully so that they  
are not exposed to excessive pressure.  
2. When you replace the system board, you must either update the server with the latest firmware or  
restore the pre-existing firmware that the customer provides on a diskette or CD image. Make sure  
that you have the latest firmware or a copy of the pre-existing firmware before you proceed. See  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
“Updating the firmware” on page 212“Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)” on page  
169“Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data” on page 171 for more information.  
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code updates. If the device  
is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code is supported for the cluster solution before  
you update the code  
To install the system board, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Align the system board with the chassis, and replace the screws that secure the system board.  
3. Reinstall the microprocessor and heat sink (see “Installing the microprocessor” on page 141).  
4. Reinstall the DIMMs (see “Installing a memory module” on page 125).  
5. Reinstall the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
6. If necessary, reinstall ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller (see “Installing an IBM  
ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller” on page 160).  
7. Reinstall the PCI riser-card assemblies and PCI cards, if any were installed (see “Installing the  
riser-card assembly” on page 158 and “Installing a PCI card” on page 132).  
8. Reinstall the virtual media key (see “Replacing the virtual media key” on page 167).  
9. Reinstall the hypervisor flash device (see “Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device” on  
page 134).  
10. Reconnect all cables to the system board that were disconnected.  
11. Install the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
12. Slide the server into the rack.  
13. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.  
14. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.  
Important: Perform the following updates:  
v Either update the server with the latest RAID firmware or restore the pre-existing firmware from a  
diskette or CD image.  
v Update the UUID (see “Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)” on page 169.  
v Update the DMI/SMBIOS (see “Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data” on page 171).  
Replacing the power supply  
This procedure is used when replacing a defective power supply.  
When you remove or install the power supply, observe the following precautions.  
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power supply do not turn off the  
electrical current supplied to the device. The device also might have more than one power cord. To  
remove all electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the  
power source.  
146 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
1
Statement 8:  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label  
attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one  
of these parts, contact a service technician.  
Removing the power supply  
To remove the power supply, complete the following steps.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Disconnect the ac power cord from the connector on the power supply. Disconnect all external cables  
from the server.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
Attention: To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30 minutes  
with the cover removed.  
4. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
5. Disconnect the power-supply cables from the connectors on the system board and from all devices;  
then, disengage the cables from any retention-clips that secure them to the side of the power-supply.  
Note: Note the routing of all power-supply cables; you will route the power-supply cables the same  
way when you install the power supply.  
6. Remove the screw ꢀ2ꢁ that holds the power supply ꢀ1ꢁ to the rear of the chassis.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Loosen the captive thumbscrew ꢀ3ꢁ that secures the power supply to the chassis bottom.  
8. Lift the power supply out of the bay.  
9. If you are instructed to return the power supply, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the power supply  
To install the replacement power supply, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Place the new power supply into the chassis.  
3. Tighten the captive thumbscrew that secures the power supply to the chassis bottom.  
4. Replace the screw that holds the power supply to the rear of the chassis.  
5. Connect the internal power-supply cables from the power supply to the power connectors on the  
system board. See “System-board internal connectors” on page 107 for the locations of the power  
connectors on the system board.  
v For power supply without advanced energy management, connect the power cables to power  
connectors 1 and 2 on the system board.  
v For high-efficient power supply with advanced energy manage, connect the power cables to  
power connectors 1, 2, 3, and 4 on the system board.  
6. Route the internal power-supply cables, securing them with the retention-clips.  
7. Test the power supply:  
a. Connect one end of the ac power cord for the new power supply into the connector on the back  
of the power supply, and connect the other end of the power cord into a properly grounded  
electrical outlet.  
b. Make sure that the standby power LED on the system board is lit (see “System-board LEDs” on  
page 112); if the standby power LED is not lit, discontinue this procedure and obtain a new  
power supply.  
c. Press the power-control button. Make sure that the power-on LED on the front of the server is lit.  
If the server starts, proceed to step 8. If the server does not start, disconnect the ac power cord and  
call for service.  
8. Turn off the server and disconnect the ac power cord.  
148 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Connect the cables from the power supply to the internal devices.  
10. Install the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
11. Install the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
12. Slide the server into the rack.  
13. Reconnect the ac power cord into the connector on the back of the power supply.  
14. Reconnect all external cables that were disconnected.  
15. Connect the other end of the ac power cord into a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
16. Press the power-control button (see “Turning on the server” on page 113.  
17. Make sure that the power-on LED on the front of the server is lit.  
Replacing a fan assembly  
The server comes with five replaceable cooling fans. Use the following procedures to replace a fan.  
Removing a fan assembly  
To remove any of the five replaceable fans, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and all peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
4. Reconnect the power cord; then, turn on the server.  
Attention: Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30 minutes) with the cover  
removed might damage server components.  
5. Determine which fan to replace by checking the LEDs on the system board (see “System-board LEDs”  
on page 112); a lit LED indicates the fan to replace.  
6. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the power cord again.  
7. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
8. Remove the failed fan from the server:  
a. Disconnect the fan cable from the system board (see “System-board internal connectors” on page  
107). You may need to disengage the cables from cable retention clips. Note the routing of the fan  
cable to the connector; you will have to route the fan cable the same way when you install the fan.  
b. Grasp the top of the fan with your index finger and thumb and lift the fan out of the server.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 14. Removing the fan  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Fan 1  
Fan 2  
Fan 3  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
Fan 4  
Fan 5  
9. If you are instructed to return the fan, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging  
materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a fan assembly  
To install the replacement fan, complete the following steps:  
1. Position the replacement fan so that the airflow arrow on the fan points toward the rear of the server.  
Note: Correct airflow is from the front to the rear of the server.  
2. Install the replacement fan in the bracket:  
a. Make sure that the fan cable ꢀ1ꢁ sits in the channel on the side of the fan.  
150 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
b. In the location from which you removed the failed fan, route the fan cable into its slot ꢀ2ꢁ in the  
fan bracket top.  
c. Insert the fan ꢀ4ꢁ into the bracket ꢀ3ꢁ.  
d. Make sure that each of the grey soft tabs on the fan is fully seated in its slot in the fan bracket.  
3. Connect the replacement fan cable to the system board.  
4. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Replacing the system-board battery  
To replace the system-board battery, complete the following procedures:  
Removing the battery  
To remove the battery, complete the following steps.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. If necessary, lift the riser-card assembly out of the way (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on  
page 157).  
5. Remove the battery:  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
a. Use a fingernail to press the top of the battery clip away from the battery. The battery pops up  
when released.  
b. Use your thumb and index finger to lift the battery from the socket.  
6. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. See “Battery return program” on  
page 225 for more information.  
Installing the battery  
The following notes describe information that you must consider when replacing the system-board  
battery in the server.  
v When replacing the system-board battery, you must replace it with a lithium battery of the same type  
from the same manufacturer.  
v After you replace the system-board battery, you must reconfigure the server and reset the system date  
and time.  
v To avoid possible danger, read and follow the following safety statement.  
Statement 2:  
152 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only an equivalent type battery recommended by the  
manufacturer. If your system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same  
module type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not  
properly used, handled, or disposed of.  
Do not:  
v Throw or immerse into water  
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)  
v Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
To install the replacement battery, complete the following steps:  
1. Follow any special handling and installation instructions that come with the replacement battery.  
2. Insert the new battery:  
a. Orient the battery so that the positive side faces up.  
b. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the socket on the side opposite the battery clip.  
c. Press the battery down into the socket until it clicks into place. Make sure that the battery clip  
holds the battery securely.  
3. Make sure that the riser-card assembly is fully seated in the connectors on the system board.  
4. If the riser-card assembly is an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly, make sure that the riser-card  
power cable ꢀ1ꢁ is connected to the riser-card assembly.  
5. Install the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
6. Slide the server into the rack.  
7. Reconnect the external cables; then, reconnect the power cords and turn on the peripheral devices and  
the server.  
Note: You must wait approximately 1 to 3 minutes after you connect the power cord of the server to  
an electrical outlet before the power-control button becomes active.  
8. Start the Setup utility and reset the configuration (see “Starting the Setup Utility” on page 200 for  
details).  
v Set the system date and time.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Set the power-on password.  
v Reconfigure the server.  
Replacing the SAS/SATA hard disk drive back plate or backplane  
To replace the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane or back plate, complete the following procedures:  
Removing the backplane or back plate (3.5-inch drives)  
To remove the Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) backplane, which is also referred to as the hot-swap SAS/SATA  
backplane, or to remove the simple-swap SATA back plate, complete the following steps.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and place it on a flat, static-protective surface.  
4. Pull the hard disk drives out of the server slightly to disengage them from the backplane or back  
plate.  
5. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
6. Lift the backplane or back plate ꢀ1ꢁ out of the server.  
7. Disconnect the backplane or back plate cables:  
v If the server is a hot-swap model, disconnect the SAS/SATA controller signal cable from the  
backplane.  
Note: You might want to disconnect the cable from the SAS/SATA controller first, or remove the  
SAS/SATA controller from its connector, to make it easier to disconnect the cable from the  
backplane or back plate.  
v If the server is a simple-swap mode that contains a standard SATA back plate, disconnect the SATA  
cable from the system board.  
v If the server is a simple-swap model that contains a SATA RAID back plate, disconnect the SAS  
signal cable from the SAS/SATA controller.  
8. If you are instructed to return the backplane or back plate, follow all packaging instructions, and use  
any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the backplane or back plate (3.5-inch drives)  
To install the replacement 3.5-inch hot-swap drives backplane or simple-swap SATA drives back plate,  
complete the following steps.  
154 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The following illustration shows installing the hot-swap SAS/SATA backplane.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Connectors  
Guide channels  
1. Connect the power cable to the replacement backplane or back plate.  
2. Reconnect the backplane or back plate cables:  
v If the server is a hot-swap model, reconnect the SAS/SATA controller signal cable to the backplane.  
v If the server is a simple-swap model that contains a standard SATA back plate, reconnect the SATA  
cable to the system board. See “System-board internal connectors” on page 107 for the location of  
the SATA connectors on the system board.  
Note: Make sure that the cable drive number on the back plate matches the SATA connector  
number on the system board.  
v
If the server is a simple-swap model that contains a SATA RAID back plate, reconnect the SAS  
signal cable to the SAS/SATA controller.  
3. Slide the backplane or back plate into the card guides, making sure that any nearby wires or cables  
are not trapped or pinched.  
4. Press firmly until the backplane or back plate is fully seated.  
5. Install the hard disk drives.  
6. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the SAS backplane (2.5-inch drives)  
ꢀ1ꢁ Alignment tabs ꢀ3ꢁ Alignment slots  
ꢀ2ꢁ Connectors  
ꢀ4ꢁ Connectors  
To remove the 2.5-inch drives backplane, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and place it on a flat, static-protective surface.  
4. Pull the hard disk drives out of the server slightly to disengage them from the backplane.  
5. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
6. Lift the backplane or back plate out of the server.  
7. Disconnect the backplane cables:  
v Disconnect the SAS/SATA controller cable from the backplane.  
v Disconnect the power cable from the backplane.  
v Disconnect the system board cable from the backplane.  
8. If you are instructed to return the backplane or back plate, follow all packaging instructions, and use  
any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
156 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing the SAS backplane (2.5-inch drives)  
To install the replacement 2.5-inch hot-swap drives backplane, complete the following steps.  
ꢀ1ꢁ Alignment tabs  
ꢀ3ꢁ Alignment slots  
ꢀ2ꢁ Drive connectors  
ꢀ4ꢁ Drive connectors  
1. Connect the cables to the replacement backplane.  
2. Slide the backplane into the card guides, making sure that any nearby wires or cables are not trapped  
or pinched.  
3. Press firmly until the backplane is fully seated and clicks into place.  
4. Install the hard disk drives.  
5. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Replacing the PCI riser-card assembly  
To replace the PCI riser-card assembly, use the following procedures:  
Removing the riser-card assembly  
To remove the riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:  
To remove the riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and place it on a flat, static-protective surface.  
4. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
5. Grasp the riser-card assembly ꢀ1ꢁ at the front and rear edges and lift to remove it from the server.  
Place the riser-card assembly on a flat, static-protective surface.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. If the riser-card assembly is an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly, disconnect the riser-card power  
cable ꢀ1ꢁ from the riser-card assembly.  
7. Disconnect any cables from the PCI cards in the riser-card assembly.  
8. If you are instructed to return the riser-card assembly, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the riser-card assembly  
To remove the riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:  
The server comes with one riser-card assembly that contains two PCI Express connectors.  
To install the riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Install the PCI cards in the riser-card assembly.  
3. Reconnect any PCI card cables that you disconnected when you removed the riser-card assembly.  
4. If the riser-card assembly is an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly, reconnect the riser-card power  
cable ꢀ1ꢁ to the riser-card assembly.  
158 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Carefully align the riser-card assembly with the guides on the rear of the server and with the  
riser-card connectors on the system board; then, press down on the assembly. Make sure that the  
riser-card assembly ꢀ1ꢁ is fully seated in the connector on the system board.  
6. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Replacing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller  
To replace an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller, use the following procedures:  
Removing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller  
To remove an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller from the system board, complete the  
following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the ability to view the LEDs  
because the LEDs are not lit when the power source is removed. Before you disconnect the power  
source, make a note of which LEDs are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operation  
information panel and LEDs inside the server on the system board.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and place it on a flat, static-protective surface.  
4. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
5. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on page 157).  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Disconnect the signal cables that are attached to the SAS/SATA controller.  
7. Grasp the SAS/SATA controller ꢀ1ꢁ while you press outward on the plastic tabs.  
8. Pull out the SAS/SATA controller from the connector ꢀ2ꢁ on the system board.  
9. If you are instructed to return the SAS/SATA controller, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller  
Read the following notes before installing the ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller.  
Notes:  
1. Some server models come with an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller installed. The  
controller can be installed only in the dedicated slot on the system board (see “System-board  
optional-device connectors” on page 109 for the location of the connector). Use the following  
procedures to install the controller if your server model did not come with this controller installed or  
to replace a failing controller.  
2. The IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller enables integrated RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E  
capability on hot-swap hard disk drives. For configuration information, see the RAID documentation  
at http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Important: To ensure that any of your ServeRAID controllers function properly on UEFI-based  
servers, make sure that the controller firmware and supporting device drivers are updated to at least  
11.x.x-XXX.  
Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code updates. If the device  
is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code is supported for the cluster solution before  
you update the code.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the ability to view the LEDs  
because the LEDs are not lit when the power source is removed. Before you disconnect the power  
source, make a note of which LEDs are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operation  
information panel and LEDs inside the server on the system board.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and place it on a flat, static-protective surface.  
160 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
5. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on page 157).  
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller to  
any unpainted surface on the outside of the server; then, grasp the controller by the top edge or  
upper corners of the controller and remove it from the package.  
7. Align the ServeRAID controller ꢀ1ꢁ so that the keys align correctly with the connector ꢀ2ꢁ on the  
system board.  
8. Insert the ServeRAID controller into the connector on the system board until it is firmly seated. The  
retention bracket secures the ServeRAID controller in place when the controller is firmly seated into  
the connector on the system board.  
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the server or the controller.  
9. Route the signal cables from the drive backplane through the fan cage hole (between fans 1 and 2) as  
shown in the following illustration.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Connect the signal cable that is attached to the drive backplane ꢀ1ꢁ to the ServeRAID controller  
connector ꢀ2ꢁ.  
11. Replace the riser-card assembly (see “Installing the riser-card assembly” on page 158).  
Note: When you restart the server, you are prompted to import the existing RAID configuration to  
the new ServeRAID controller.  
12. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Replacing the DVD drive cable  
To replace the optical drive cable, complete the following procedures:  
Removing the DVD drive cable  
To remove the DVD drive cable, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Replacing the PCI riser-card assembly” on page 157).  
5. Remove the DVD drive (see “Replacing a DVD drive” on page 164).  
6. From the front of the server, press the cable connector latch ꢀ1ꢁ and slide the DVD drive cable to the  
unlock position; then, slide the cable connector to the right and pull the cable out from the connector.  
162 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Remove the cable from the DVD drive cage connector.  
8. Disconnect the DVD drive power cable from the power supply cable.  
9. If you are instructed to return the DVD drive cable, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the DVD drive cable  
To install the DVD drive cable, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Align the cable connector with the connector on the rear of the DVD drive cage and press the cable  
connector into the DVD drive cage connector until it is firmly seated.  
4. Pull the cable connector latch ꢀ2ꢁ up and hold it there while you slide the cable connector to the lock  
position; then, slide the cable connector latch down to lock the cable in place.  
The following illustration shows cable routing for the DVD drive cable.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: Route the DVD drive cable ꢀ2ꢁ through the fan cage hole on the left of fan 1.  
5. Connect the DVD drive cable to the system board connector ꢀ1ꢁ.  
6. Reconnect the DVD drive power cable to the power supply cable.  
7. Reinstall the DVD drive (see “Replacing a DVD drive”).  
8. Reinstall the riser-card assembly (see “Installing the riser-card assembly” on page 158).  
9. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Replacing a DVD drive  
To replace a DVD drive, complete the following procedures:  
Removing a DVD drive  
To remove a DVD drive, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. Pull the release tab ꢀ1ꢁ (the rear of the drive-retention clip) toward the right side of the server to  
release the clip; then, while you pull the tab, push the drive out of the bay.  
Note: You might have to push the right-rear corner of the drive toward the front of the server to  
move the drive initially.  
164 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Remove the retention clip ꢀ1ꢁ from the drive and save for future use.  
6. If you are instructed to return the DVD drive, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a DVD drive  
The following notes describe the type of drives that the server supports and other information that you  
must consider when you install a DVD drive.  
v Locate the documentation that comes with the drive and follow those instructions in addition to the  
instructions in this chapter.  
v Make sure that you have all the cables and other equipment that are specified in the documentation  
that comes with the drive.  
v The server supports one ultra-slim SATA DVD drive.  
To install a DVD drive, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new DVD drive to any unpainted metal surface  
on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place it on a static-protective surface.  
5. Follow the instructions that come with the drive to set any jumpers or switches.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Attach the drive-retention clip ꢀ1ꢁ that you removed from the failing drive to the side of the new  
DVD drive.  
Note: If you are installing a drive that contains a laser, observe the following safety precaution.  
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or transmitters) are  
installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to  
hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein  
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical  
instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Laser Klasse 1  
Laser Klass 1  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
`
Appareil A Laser de Classe 1  
7. Slide the drive into the DVD drive bay until the drive clicks into place.  
8. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
166 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the virtual media key  
To replace the virtual media key, complete the following procedures:  
Removing the virtual media key  
To remove the virtual media key, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then, remove the cover  
(see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
3. Grasp the virtual media key ꢀ4ꢁ and gently slide it up and off of the mounting tab ꢀ2ꢁ.  
Microprocessor  
Heatsink  
Orientation  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
4. If you are instructed to return the virtual media key, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the virtual media key  
To install the virtual media key, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
3. Align the virtual media key ꢀ4ꢁ with the mounting tab ꢀ2ꢁ and ꢀ1ꢁ; then slide it down the tab onto  
the connector ꢀ3ꢁ on the system board. Press the virtual media key down into the connector until it is  
firmly seated on the system board.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Microprocessor  
Heatsink  
Orientation  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
4. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Replacing the PCI-X riser-card power cable  
To replace the PCI-X riser-card power cable, use the following procedures:  
Removing the PCI-X riser-card power cable  
If an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly is installed in the server, an internal power cable for the  
assembly is also installed.  
To remove the PCI-X riser-card power cable, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and place it on a flat, static-protective surface.  
4. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
5. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Replacing the PCI riser-card assembly” on page 157).  
6. Remove the PCI card from the riser-card assembly if one is installed (see “Removing a PCI card” on  
page 130).  
168 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Disconnect the riser-card power cable from the PCI-X riser card.  
8. If you are instructed to return the PCI-X riser-card power cable, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the PCI-X riser-card power cable  
To install the replacement PCI-X riser-card power cable, complete the following steps.  
1. Connect the riser-card power cable to the PCI-X riser-card assembly.  
2. Install the adapter in the riser-card assembly (see “Installing a PCI card” on page 132).  
3. Install the riser-card assembly (see “Installing the riser-card assembly” on page 158).  
4. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 173.  
Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)  
The Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) must be updated when the system board is replaced. Use the  
Advanced Settings Utility to update the UUID in the UEFI-based server. The ASU is an online tool that  
supports several operating systems. Make sure that you download the version for your operating system.  
To download the ASU and update the UUID, complete the following steps:  
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):  
a. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage from  
the Select your product list.  
c. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210;, and click Continue.  
d. Click Downloads and drivers to link to the ASU program.  
2. ASU sets the UUID in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of the following  
methods to access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to set the UUID:  
v Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)  
v Remote access to the target system (LAN based)  
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to the server. Make sure  
that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the same directory. In addition to the application  
executable (asu or asu64), the following files are required:  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v For Windows based operating systems:  
– ibm_rndis_server_os.inf  
– device.cat  
v For Linux based operating systems:  
– cdc_interface.sh  
4. After you install ASU, use the following command syntax to set the UUID:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> [access_method]  
Where:  
<uuid_value>  
Up to 16-byte hexadecimal value assigned by you.  
[access_method]  
The access method that you selected to use from the following methods:  
v Online authenticated LAN access, type the command:  
[host <imm_internal_ip>] [user <imm_user_id>][password <imm_password>]  
Where:  
imm_internal_ip  
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The default value is 169.254.95.118.  
imm_user_id  
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.  
imm_password  
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is PASSW0RD (with a  
zero 0 not an O).  
Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the default values. When the  
default values are used and ASU is unable to access the IMM using the online authenticated LAN  
access method, ASU will automatically use the unauthenticated KCS access method.  
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password default values and not  
using the default values:  
Example that does not use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> user <user_id>  
password <password>  
Example that does use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>  
v Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted):  
You do not need to specify a value for access_method when you use this access method.  
Example:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>  
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires that the IPMI driver be  
installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI driver installed by default. ASU provides the  
corresponding mapping layer. See the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide for more details. You can  
access the ASU Users Guide from the Lenovo support Web site.  
a. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage  
from the Select your product list.  
c. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210;, and click Continue.  
d. Click Downloads and drivers.  
170 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e. Click User’s guides and manuals to link to the ASU Users Guide.  
v Remote LAN access, type the command:  
Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the LAN from a client, the  
host and the imm_external_ip address are required parameters.  
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>[[password <imm_password>]  
Where:  
imm_external_ip  
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no default value. This parameter is required.  
imm_user_id  
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.  
imm_password  
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is PASSW0RD (with a  
zero 0 not an O).  
The following commands are examples of using the user ID and password default values and not  
using the default values:  
Example that does not use the user ID and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> host <imm_ip>  
user <user_id> password <password>  
Example that does use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> host <imm_ip>  
5. Restart the server.  
Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data  
The Desktop Management Interface (DMI) must be updated when the system board is replaced. Use the  
Advanced Settings Utility to update the DMI in the UEFI-based server. The ASU is an online tool that  
supports several operating systems. Make sure that you download the version for your operating system.  
To download the ASU and update the DMI, complete the following steps.  
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):  
a. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage from  
the Select your product list.  
c. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210;, and click Continue.  
d. Click Downloads and drivers to link to the ASU program.  
2. ASU sets the DMI in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of the following methods  
to access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to set the DMI:  
v Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)  
v Remote access to the target system (LAN based)  
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to the server. Make sure  
that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the same directory. In addition to the application  
executable (asu or asu64), the following files are required:  
v For Windows based operating systems:  
– ibm_rndis_server_os.inf  
– device.cat  
v For Linux based operating systems:  
– cdc_interface.sh  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. After you install ASU, Type the following commands to set the DMI:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> [access_method]  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> [access_method]  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> [access_method]  
Where:  
<m/t_model>  
The server machine type and model number. Type mtm xxxxyy, where xxxx is the machine  
type and yyy is the server model number.  
<s/n> The serial number on the server. Type sn zzzzzzz, where zzzzzzz is the serial number.  
<asset_method>  
The server asset tag number. Type asset aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa, where  
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa is the asset tag number.  
[access_method]  
The access method that you select to use from the following methods:  
v Online authenticated LAN access, type the command:  
[host <imm_internal_ip>] [user <imm_user_id>][password <imm_password>]  
Where:  
imm_internal_ip  
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The default value is 169.254.95.118.  
imm_user_id  
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.  
imm_password  
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is PASSW0RD (with a  
zero 0 not an O).  
Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the default values. When the  
default values are used and ASU is unable to access the IMM using the online authenticated LAN  
access method, ASU will automatically use the following unauthenticated KCS access method.  
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password default values and not  
using the default values:  
Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>  
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> user <imm_user_id>  
password <imm_password>  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>  
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>  
Examples that do use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model>  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n>  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>  
v Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted):  
You do not need to specify a value for access_method when you use this access method.  
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires that the IPMI driver be  
installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI driver installed by default. ASU provides the  
corresponding mapping layer. To see the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide. You can access the  
ASU Users Guide from the Lenovo support Web site.  
172 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage  
from the Select your product list.  
c. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210;, and click Continue.  
d. Click Downloads and drivers.  
e. Click User’s guides and manuals to link to the ASU Users Guide.  
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password default values and not  
using the default values:  
Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n>  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>  
v Remote LAN access, type the command:  
Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the LAN from a client, the  
host and the imm_external_ip address are required parameters.  
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>[[password <imm_password>]  
Where:  
imm_external_ip  
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no default value. This parameter is required.  
imm_user_id  
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.  
imm_password  
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is PASSW0RD (with a  
zero 0 not an O).  
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password default values and not  
using the default values:  
Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model> host <imm_ip>  
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> host <imm_ip>  
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> host <imm_ip>  
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>  
Examples that do use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> host <imm_ip>  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> host <imm_ip>  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> host <imm_ip>  
5. Restart the server.  
Completing the FRU replacement  
To complete the installation, do the following:  
1. If the DIMM air baffle was removed, reinstall it now (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air  
baffle” on page 121).  
2. Reinstall the cover if it was removed (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
3. Reinstall the server in the rack cabinet.  
4. Reconnect all cables and power cords (see “Connecting the cables” on page 174.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Update the server configuration (see “Updating the server configuration” on page 175).  
6. Slide the server back into the rack, if necessary.  
7. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.  
Connecting the cables  
The following illustration shows the locations of the input and output connectors on the front of the  
server.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
Power-on LED  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
ꢀ10ꢁ  
System-error LED  
Power-control button  
Reset button  
USB 1 connector  
USB 2 connector  
Hard disk drive activity LED  
Locator LED  
Hard disk drive activity LED (green)  
Hard disk drive status LED (amber)  
174 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following illustration shows the connectors and LEDs on the rear of the server.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
Power-cord connector  
Serial connector  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
NMI button  
ꢀ10ꢁ  
ꢀ11ꢁ  
ꢀ12ꢁ  
ꢀ13ꢁ  
ꢀ14ꢁ  
ꢀ15ꢁ  
USB 3-4 connector  
Ethernet 1 activity LED  
Ethernet 1 link LED  
Ethernet 2 activity LED  
Ethernet 2 link LED  
PCI slot 1  
USB 1-2 connector  
Video connector  
Power supply error LED (amber)  
DC power LED (green)  
AC power LED (green)  
PCI slot 2  
You must turn off the server before you connect or disconnect cables.  
See the documentation that comes with any external devices for additional cabling instructions. It might  
be easier for you to route cables before you connect the devices to the server.  
Cable identifiers are printed on the cables that come with the server and optional devices. Use these  
identifiers to connect the cables to the correct connectors.  
Updating the server configuration  
When you start the server for the first time after you add or remove an internal option or external device,  
you might receive a message that the configuration has changed. The UEFI Setup Utility program starts  
automatically so that you can save the new configuration settings.  
Some options have device drivers that you must install. For information about installing device drivers,  
see the documentation that comes with each option.  
If the server has an optional RAID and you have installed or removed a hard disk drive, see the  
documentation that comes with the RAID for information about reconfiguring the disk arrays.  
For information about configuring the integrated Gigabit Ethernet controller, see “Configuring the Gigabit  
Ethernet controllers” on page 219.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
176 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and  
6534  
The following replaceable components are available for the ThinkServer RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533,  
and 6534 servers. To check for an updated parts listing on the Web, complete the following steps:  
1. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage from the  
Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210, and click Continue.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2007, 2009.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
Riser card assembly  
DIMM air baffle  
DIMM  
Power supply  
SAS/SATA backplane (some models)  
SATA simple-swap back panel (some models)  
3.5-inch drive cage  
3.5-inch simple-swap SATA hard disk drive (some  
models)  
ꢀ12ꢁ  
ꢀ13ꢁ  
ꢀ14ꢁ  
ꢀ15ꢁ  
ꢀ16ꢁ  
ꢀ17ꢁ  
ꢀ18ꢁ  
ꢀ19ꢁ  
Bezel  
DVD drive filler  
Operator information panel  
Fans  
System board  
Microprocessor  
Heat sink  
Cover  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
Simple-swap SATA filler  
ꢀ10ꢁ  
ꢀ11ꢁ  
Hot-swap hard disk drive filler  
3.5-inch or 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive  
(depending on model)  
178 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replaceable server components  
Replaceable components are of three types:  
v Self-service customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of self-service CRUs is your responsibility.  
If Lenovo installs a self-service CRU at your request, you will be charged for the installation.  
v Optional-service customer replaceable unit: You may install an optional-service CRU yourself or  
request Lenovo to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty service that is  
designated for your server.  
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service technicians.  
For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance, see the Warranty and  
Support Information document.  
The following table lists the part numbers for the server components.  
Table 15. Parts listing, Types 6531  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
1
1
1
2
3
Riser PCIX (models CTO All Models)  
49Y4675  
46C6796  
49Y4673  
46C6798  
46U1991  
Riser PCI-E LP (models CTO All Models)  
Riser PCI-E FH (models CTO All Models)  
Air Duct (models CTO All Models)  
Memory module, 1GB DDR3-1333 1Rx8 LP RDIMM  
(models CTO)  
3
Memory module, 1GB (1x1GB, Single Rankx8) PC3-10600  
CL9 ECC DDR3 1333MHz LP UDIMM (models CTO 11U  
11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L  
12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
46U2906  
3
3
3
3
4
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP UDIMM  
(models CTO)  
46U2907  
46U1992  
46U2941  
46U2942  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP RDIMM  
(models CTO)  
Memory module, 4GB (1x4GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500  
CL7 ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 8GB (1x8GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500  
CL7 ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Power supply, 351W-LE PSU (models CTO 11U 11F 11S  
11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y  
12G 12M 12A 12J)  
49Y4663  
49Y4664  
4
5
Power supply, 351W-HE PSU (models CTO)  
SAS HS BACKPLANE 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Backplane 2.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
3.5″ DASD CAGE (models CTO All Models)  
SATA Filler 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Filler 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
46C6756  
46C6757  
6
7
59Y3226  
39M4343  
39M4375  
45J9642  
9
10  
11  
Hard disk drive, 250GB 7200 RPM 3.5″ Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
11  
Hard disk drive, 500GB 7200 RPM 3.5″ Hot-Swap SATA II  
45J9644  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 15. Parts listing, Types 6531 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
Hard disk drive, 146GB 15K 3.5″ Hot-Swap SAS (models  
CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
45J9658  
Hard disk drive, 750GB 7200 RPM 3.5″ Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J )  
45J9646  
Hard disk drive, IBM 1TB 7200 SATA 3.5’’ HS HDD  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
45J9648  
IBM 146GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
46U2120  
46U2124  
46U2128  
46U2117  
46U2758  
46U3014  
46U3015  
46U3016  
IBM 300GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
IBM 73GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
IBM 146GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
IBM 500GB 7200 6Gbps NL SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
ThinkServer 300GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
ThinkServer 450GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
ThinkServer 600GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
12  
13  
15  
16  
17  
Front Bezel (models CTO All Models)  
DVD Blank (models CTO All Models)  
SYSTEM FAN (models CTO All Models)  
System board, Planar (models CTO All Models)  
46U2944  
49Y4868  
59Y3212  
69Y1013  
49Y4645  
Microprocessor, Celeron G1101 2.26GHz/1066MHz-2MB  
2C (models CTO)  
17  
17  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3460 2.8GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
49Y4646  
49Y4647  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3430 2.4GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J  
12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3440 2.53GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
49Y4648  
49Y4649  
49Y4668  
46C6775  
59Y3175  
59Y3176  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3450 2.67GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Pentium G6950 2.8 GHz/1066MHz-3MB  
2C (models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3470 2.93GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-540 3.06 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-530 2.93 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
180 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 15. Parts listing, Types 6531 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
18  
19  
Heat Sink (models CTO All Models)  
59Y3221  
TOP-COVER (models CTO All Models)  
59Y3223  
33F8354  
24P1121  
39M4351  
41Y3884  
59Y3210  
59Y3214  
59Y3228  
59Y3230  
44T2248  
46C6797  
59Y3218  
59Y3225  
59Y3227  
39Y6070  
System battery (models CTO All Models)  
1U Tool-Less Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
EAR Bracket (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, miniSAS Cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, Backplane cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 500mm SAS Cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, Front I/O Cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 3.5″ SS SATA Cable (models CTO All Models)  
Blank EMC Shield (models CTO All Models)  
Fornt I/O Board (models CTO All Models)  
HD InstCaution Label (models CTO All Models)  
Low case (models CTO All Models)  
2.5″ DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
NetXtreme II 1000 Express Ethernet Adapter (models CTO  
All Models)  
PRO/1K PT Dual (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PT Quad (models CTO All Models)  
2Post Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PF Srvr (models CTO All Models)  
QLogic 10Gb adapter (models CTO All Models)  
SATA DVD-ROM (models CTO)  
39Y6128  
39Y6138  
42C1069  
42C1752  
42C1802  
44W3254  
44W3255  
44W3256  
43W4297  
44E8696  
SATA CD-RW DVD (models CTO)  
SATA Mulitburn (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA Controller (models  
CTO)  
IBM 3Gb SAS HBA Controller v2 (models CTO)  
44E8701  
49Y4737  
ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller v2 (models CTO  
11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S  
12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
ServeRAID M5015 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5025 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M1015 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10i Li-Ion Battery (models CTO)  
46M0851  
46M0854  
46M0862  
43W4301  
43W4341  
ServeRAID-MR10M SAS/SATA Controller with Remote  
Battery Kit (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M1015 RAID 5 Upgrade Key (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5014 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
46M0864  
46M0922  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6531 Software FRU  
FRU#  
EasyManage (models CTO All Models)  
69Y9937  
90Y1164  
90Y1165  
90Y1166  
90Y1167  
90Y1168  
90Y1169  
90Y1170  
90Y1171  
90Y1172  
90Y1173  
90Y1174  
90Y1175  
90Y1176  
90Y1177  
90Y1178  
90Y1179  
90Y1180  
90Y1181  
90Y1182  
90Y1183  
90Y1184  
90Y1185  
90Y1186  
90Y1187  
90Y1188  
90Y1189  
90Y1190  
90Y1191  
90Y1192  
90Y1193  
90Y1194  
90Y1195  
90Y1196  
90Y1197  
90Y1198  
90Y1199  
90Y1200  
Documentation DVD (models CTO All Models)  
EasyStartup (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 PREM 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/JP (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/FR/GR/SP/IT (models CTO All Models)  
182 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 16. Parts listing, Types 6532  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
1
1
1
2
3
Riser PCIX (models CTO All Models)  
49Y4675  
46C6796  
49Y4673  
46C6798  
46U1991  
Riser PCI-E LP (models CTO All Models)  
Riser PCI-E FH (models CTO All Models)  
Air Duct (models CTO All Models)  
Memory module, 1GB DDR3-1333 1Rx8 LP RDIMM  
(models CTO)  
3
Memory module, 1GB (1x1GB, Single Rankx8) PC3-10600  
CL9 ECC DDR3 1333MHz LP UDIMM (models CTO 11U  
11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L  
12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
46U2906  
3
3
3
3
4
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP UDIMM  
(models CTO)  
46U2907  
46U1992  
46U2941  
46U2942  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP RDIMM  
(models CTO)  
Memory module, 4GB (1x4GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500  
CL7 ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 8GB (1x8GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500  
CL7 ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Power supply, 351W-LE PSU (models CTO 11U 11F 11S  
11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y  
12G 12M 12A 12J)  
49Y4663  
49Y4664  
4
5
Power supply, 351W-HE PSU (models CTO)  
SAS HS BACKPLANE 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Backplane 2.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
3.5″ DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
SATA Filler 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Filler 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
46C6756  
46C6757  
6
7
59Y3226  
39M4343  
39M4375  
45J9642  
9
10  
11  
Hard disk drive, 250GB 7200 RPM 3.5″ Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
Hard disk drive, 500GB 7200 RPM 3.5″ Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
45J9644  
45J9658  
45J9646  
45J9648  
46U2120  
46U2124  
46U2128  
Hard disk drive, 146GB 15K 3.5″ Hot-Swap SAS (models  
CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Hard disk drive, 750GB 7200 RPM 3.5″ Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Hard disk drive, IBM 1TB 7200 SATA 3.5’’ HS HDD  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
IBM 146GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
IBM 300GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
IBM 73GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 16. Parts listing, Types 6532 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
IBM 146GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
46U2117  
46U2758  
46U3014  
46U3015  
46U3016  
IBM 500GB 7200 6Gbps NL SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
ThinkServer 300GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
ThinkServer 450GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
ThinkServer 600GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
12  
13  
15  
16  
17  
Front Bezel (models CTO All Models)  
DVD Blank (models CTO All Models)  
System fan (models CTO All Models)  
System board, Planar (models CTO All Models)  
46U2944  
49Y4868  
59Y3212  
69Y1013  
49Y4645  
Microprocessor, Celeron G1101 2.26GHz/1066MHz-2MB  
2C (models CTO)  
17  
17  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3460 2.8GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
49Y4646  
49Y4647  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3430 2.4GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J  
12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3440 2.53GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
49Y4648  
49Y4649  
49Y4668  
46C6775  
59Y3175  
59Y3176  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3450 2.67GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Pentium G6950 2.8 GHz/1066MHz-3MB  
2C (models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3470 2.93GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-540 3.06 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-530 2.93 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
18  
19  
Heat Sink (models CTO All Models)  
59Y3221  
Top cover (models CTO All Models)  
59Y3223  
33F8354  
24P1121  
39M4351  
41Y3884  
59Y3210  
59Y3214  
59Y3228  
59Y3230  
System battery (models CTO All Models)  
1U Tool-Less Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
EAR Bracket (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, mini SAS cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, backplane cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 500mm SAS cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, Front I/O cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 3.5″ SS SATA cable (models CTO All Models)  
184 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 16. Parts listing, Types 6532 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
Blank EMC shield (models CTO All Models)  
Fornt I/O board (models CTO All Models)  
HD InstCaution Label (models CTO All Models)  
Low case (models CTO All Models)  
2.5″ DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
44T2248  
46C6797  
59Y3218  
59Y3225  
59Y3227  
39Y6070  
NetXtreme II 1000 Express Ethernet Adapter (models CTO  
All Models)  
PRO/1K PT Dual (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PT Quad (models CTO All Models)  
2Post Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PF Srvr (models CTO All Models)  
QLogic 10Gb adapter (models CTO All Models)  
SATA DVD-ROM (models CTO)  
39Y6128  
39Y6138  
42C1069  
42C1752  
42C1802  
44W3254  
44W3255  
44W3256  
43W4297  
44E8696  
SATA CD-RW DVD (models CTO)  
SATA Mulitburn (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller (models  
CTO)  
IBM 3Gb SAS HBA controller v2 (models CTO)  
44E8701  
49Y4737  
ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller v2 (models CTO  
11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S  
12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
ServeRAID M5015 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5025 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M1015 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10i Li-Ion Battery (models CTO)  
46M0851  
46M0854  
46M0862  
43W4301  
43W4341  
ServeRAID-MR10M SAS/SATA controller with Remote  
Battery Kit (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M1015 RAID 5 Upgrade Key (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5014 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
46M0864  
46M0922  
6532 Software FRU  
EasyManage (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
69Y9937  
90Y1164  
90Y1165  
90Y1166  
90Y1167  
90Y1168  
90Y1169  
90Y1170  
Documentation DVD (models CTO All Models)  
EasyStartup (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6532 Software FRU  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
90Y1171  
90Y1172  
90Y1173  
90Y1174  
90Y1175  
90Y1176  
90Y1177  
90Y1178  
90Y1179  
90Y1180  
90Y1181  
90Y1182  
90Y1183  
90Y1184  
90Y1185  
90Y1186  
90Y1187  
90Y1188  
90Y1189  
90Y1190  
90Y1191  
90Y1192  
90Y1193  
90Y1194  
90Y1195  
90Y1196  
90Y1197  
90Y1198  
90Y1199  
90Y1200  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 PREM 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/JP (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/FR/GR/SP/IT (models CTO All Models)  
Table 17. Parts listing, Types 6533  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
1
1
1
2
3
Riser PCIX (models CTO All Models)  
49Y4675  
46C6796  
49Y4673  
46C6798  
46U1991  
Riser PCI-E LP (models CTO All Models)  
Riser PCI-E FH (models CTO All Models)  
Air Duct (models CTO All Models)  
Memory module, 1GB DDR3-1333 1Rx8 LP RDIMM  
(models CTO)  
186 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 17. Parts listing, Types 6533 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
3
3
3
3
3
4
Memory module, 1GB (1x1GB, Single Rankx8) PC3-10600  
CL9 ECC DDR3 1333MHz LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
46U2906  
46U2907  
46U1992  
46U2941  
46U2942  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP UDIMM  
(models CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP RDIMM  
(models CTO)  
Memory module, 4GB (1x4GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500  
CL7 ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 8GB (1x8GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500  
CL7 ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Power supply, 351W-LE PSU (models CTO 11G 11M 11A  
11J)  
49Y4663  
49Y4664  
4
5
6
7
8
Power supply, 351W-HE PSU (models CTO)  
SAS HS BACKPLANE 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Backplane 2.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
3.5″ DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
46C6756  
46C6757  
59Y3226  
45J9634  
Hard disk drive, 250GB 7200 RPM 3.5″ Simple-Swap SATA  
II (models CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
8
8
8
Hard disk drive, 500GB 7200 RPM 3.5″ Simple-Swap SATA  
II (models CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J )  
46U1024  
45J9638  
46U2916  
Hard disk drive, 750GB 7200 RPM 3.5″ Simple-Swap SATA  
II (models CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J )  
Hard disk drive, IBM Server 1TB 7200 SATA 3.5″ Simple  
Swap HDD (models CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
9
SATA Filler 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Filler 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
Front Bezel (models CTO All Models)  
DVD Blank (models CTO All Models)  
System fan (models CTO All Models)  
System board, Planar (models CTO All Models)  
39M4343  
39M4375  
46U2944  
49Y4868  
59Y3212  
10  
12  
13  
15  
16  
17  
69Y1013  
49Y4645  
Microprocessor, Celeron G1101 2.26GHz/1066MHz-2MB  
2C (models CTO)  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3460 2.8GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
49Y4646  
49Y4647  
49Y4648  
49Y4649  
49Y4668  
46C6775  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3430 2.4GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3440 2.53GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3450 2.67GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Pentium G6950 2.8 GHz/1066MHz-3MB  
2C (models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3470 2.93GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 17. Parts listing, Types 6533 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
17  
Microprocessor, Core i3-540 3.06 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
59Y3175  
17  
Microprocessor, Core i3-530 2.93 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
59Y3176  
18  
19  
Heat Sink (models CTO All Models)  
59Y3221  
Top cover (models CTO All Models)  
59Y3223  
33F8354  
24P1121  
39M4351  
41Y3884  
59Y3210  
59Y3214  
59Y3228  
59Y3230  
44T2248  
46C6797  
59Y3218  
59Y3225  
59Y3227  
39Y6070  
System battery (models CTO All Models)  
1U Tool-Less Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
EAR Bracket (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, mini SAS cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, backplane cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 500mm SAS cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, Front I/O cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 3.5″ SS SATA cable (models CTO All Models)  
Blank EMC shield (models CTO All Models)  
Fornt I/O board (models CTO All Models)  
HD InstCaution Label (models CTO All Models)  
Low case (models CTO All Models)  
2.5″ DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
NetXtreme II 1000 Express Ethernet Adapter (models CTO  
All Models)  
PRO/1K PT Dual (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PT Quad (models CTO All Models)  
2Post Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PF Srvr (models CTO All Models)  
QLogic 10Gb adapter (models CTO All Models)  
SATA DVD-ROM (models CTO)  
39Y6128  
39Y6138  
42C1069  
42C1752  
42C1802  
44W3254  
44W3255  
44W3256  
43W4297  
44E8696  
SATA CD-RW DVD (models CTO)  
SATA Mulitburn (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller (models  
CTO)  
IBM 3Gb SAS HBA controller v2 (models CTO)  
44E8701  
49Y4737  
46M0851  
46M0854  
46M0862  
ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller v2 (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5015 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5025 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M1015 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO 11U  
11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
ServeRAID-MR10i Li-Ion Battery (models CTO)  
43W4301  
188 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 17. Parts listing, Types 6533 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
ServeRAID-MR10M SAS/SATA controller with Remote  
Battery Kit (models CTO)  
43W4341  
ServeRAID M1015 RAID 5 Upgrade Key (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5014 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
46M0864  
46M0922  
6533 Software FRU  
EasyManage (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
69Y9937  
90Y1164  
90Y1165  
90Y1166  
90Y1167  
90Y1168  
90Y1169  
90Y1170  
90Y1171  
90Y1172  
90Y1173  
90Y1174  
90Y1175  
90Y1176  
90Y1177  
90Y1178  
90Y1179  
90Y1180  
90Y1181  
90Y1182  
90Y1183  
90Y1184  
90Y1185  
90Y1186  
90Y1187  
90Y1188  
90Y1189  
90Y1190  
90Y1191  
90Y1192  
90Y1193  
90Y1194  
90Y1195  
Documentation DVD (models CTO All Models)  
EasyStartup (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 PREM 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6533 Software FRU  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
90Y1196  
90Y1197  
90Y1198  
90Y1199  
90Y1200  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/JP (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/FR/GR/SP/IT (models CTO All Models)  
Table 18. Parts listing, Types 6534  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
1
1
1
2
3
Riser PCIX (models CTO All Models)  
49Y4675  
46C6796  
49Y4673  
46C6798  
46U1991  
Riser PCI-E LP (models CTO All Models)  
Riser PCI-E FH (models CTO All Models)  
Air Duct (models CTO All Models)  
Memory module, 1GB DDR3-1333 1Rx8 LP RDIMM  
(models CTO)  
3
3
Memory module, 1GB (1x1GB, Single Rankx8) PC3-10600  
CL9 ECC DDR3 1333MHz LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
46U2906  
46U2907  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP UDIMM  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J  
15G 15M 15A 15J)  
3
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP RDIMM  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J  
13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J)  
46U1992  
3
3
4
Memory module, 4GB (1x4GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500  
CL7 ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
46U2941  
46U2942  
Memory module, 8GB (1x8GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500  
CL7 ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Power supply, 351W-LE PSU (models CTO 11U 11F 11S  
11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y  
12G 12M 12A 12J 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A  
13J)  
49Y4663  
49Y4664  
4
Power supply, 351W-HE PSU (models CTO 14U 14F 14S  
14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
5
6
SAS HS BACKPLANE 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Backplane 2.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
3.5″ DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
SATA Filler 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Filler 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)  
46C6756  
46C6757  
7
59Y3226  
39M4343  
39M4375  
45J9642  
9
10  
11  
Hard disk drive, 250GB 7200 RPM 3.5″ Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J  
12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
11  
Hard disk drive, 500GB 7200 RPM 3.5″ Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J  
12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
45J9644  
190 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 18. Parts listing, Types 6534 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
11  
11  
11  
11  
Hard disk drive, 146GB 15K 3.5″ Hot-Swap SAS (models  
CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F  
12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J )  
45J9658  
45J9646  
45J9648  
46U2120  
Hard disk drive, 750GB 7200 RPM 3.5″ Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J  
12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J )  
Hard disk drive, IBM 1TB 7200 SATA 3.5’’ HS hard disk  
drive (models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A  
11J 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J )  
IBM 146GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J  
14U 14F 14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A  
15J)  
11  
IBM 300GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J  
14U 14F 14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A  
15J)  
46U2124  
11  
11  
IBM 73GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J 14U 14F  
14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
46U2128  
46U2117  
IBM 146GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J  
14U 14F 14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A  
15J)  
11  
IBM 500GB 7200 6Gbps NL SAS 2.5″ SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J  
14U 14F 14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A  
15J)  
46U2758  
11  
11  
11  
ThinkServer 300GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
46U3014  
46U3015  
46U3016  
ThinkServer 450GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
ThinkServer 600GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
12  
13  
15  
16  
17  
Front Bezel (models CTO All Models)  
DVD Blank (models CTO All Models)  
System fan (models CTO All Models)  
System board, Planar (models CTO All Models)  
46U2944  
49Y4868  
59Y3212  
69Y1013  
49Y4645  
Microprocessor, Celeron G1101 2.26GHz/1066MHz-2MB  
2C (models CTO)  
17  
17  
17  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3460 2.8GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
49Y4646  
49Y4647  
49Y4648  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3430 2.4GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3440 2.53GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 18. Parts listing, Types 6534 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
17  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3450 2.67GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J  
13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J 14U 14F 14S  
14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J)  
49Y4649  
17  
17  
17  
17  
Microprocessor, Pentium G6950 2.8 GHz/1066MHz-3MB  
2C (models CTO)  
49Y4668  
46C6775  
59Y3175  
59Y3176  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3470 2.93GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-540 3.06 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-530 2.93 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
18  
19  
Heat Sink (models CTO All Models)  
59Y3221  
Top cover (models CTO All Models)  
59Y3223  
33F8354  
24P1121  
39M4351  
41Y3884  
59Y3210  
59Y3214  
59Y3228  
59Y3230  
44T2248  
46C6797  
59Y3218  
59Y3225  
59Y3227  
39Y6070  
System battery (models CTO All Models)  
1U Tool-Less Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
EAR Bracket (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, mini SAS cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, backplane cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 500mm SAS cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, Front I/O cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 3.5″ SS SATA cable (models CTO All Models)  
Blank EMC shield (models CTO All Models)  
Fornt I/O board (models CTO All Models)  
HD InstCaution Label (models CTO All Models)  
Low case (models CTO All Models)  
2.5″ DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
NetXtreme II 1000 Express Ethernet Adapter (models CTO  
All Models)  
PRO/1K PT Dual (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PT Quad (models CTO All Models)  
2Post Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PF Srvr (models CTO All Models)  
QLogic 10Gb adapter (models CTO All Models)  
SATA DVD-ROM (models CTO)  
39Y6128  
39Y6138  
42C1069  
42C1752  
42C1802  
44W3254  
44W3255  
44W3256  
SATA CD-RW DVD (models CTO)  
SATA Mulitburn (models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y  
11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A  
12J 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J 14U 14F  
14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
43W4297  
192 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 18. Parts listing, Types 6534 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller (models  
CTO)  
44E8696  
IBM 3Gb SAS HBA controller v2 (models CTO)  
44E8701  
49Y4737  
ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller v2 (models CTO  
11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
ServeRAID M5015 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO 14U  
14F 14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
46M0851  
ServeRAID M5025 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
46M0854  
46M0862  
ServeRAID M1015 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO 12U  
12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J 13U 13F 13S 13L  
13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J)  
ServeRAID-MR10i Li-Ion Battery (models CTO)  
43W4301  
43W4341  
ServeRAID-MR10M SAS/SATA controller with Remote  
Battery Kit (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M1015 RAID 5 Upgrade Key (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5014 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
46M0864  
46M0922  
6534 Software FRU  
EasyManage (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
69Y9937  
90Y1164  
90Y1165  
90Y1166  
90Y1167  
90Y1168  
90Y1169  
90Y1170  
90Y1171  
90Y1172  
90Y1173  
90Y1174  
90Y1175  
90Y1176  
90Y1177  
90Y1178  
90Y1179  
90Y1180  
90Y1181  
90Y1182  
90Y1183  
90Y1184  
Documentation DVD (models CTO All Models)  
EasyStartup (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 PREM 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6534 Software FRU  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
90Y1185  
90Y1186  
90Y1187  
90Y1188  
90Y1189  
90Y1190  
90Y1191  
90Y1192  
90Y1193  
90Y1194  
90Y1195  
90Y1196  
90Y1197  
90Y1198  
90Y1199  
90Y1200  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/JP (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/FR/GR/SP/IT (models CTO All Models)  
Power cords  
For your safety, Lenovo provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use with this Lenovo  
product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and plug with a properly grounded outlet.  
Lenovo power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL)  
and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).  
For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified cord set consisting of a  
minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel  
blade, grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.  
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified cord set  
consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in  
length and a tandem blade, grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.  
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set with a grounding-type  
attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate safety approvals for the country in which the  
equipment will be installed.  
Lenovo power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that country or region.  
194 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 19. Power cords, Type 6531  
Lenovo Power cord part  
number  
Used in these countries and regions  
39M5247  
39M5102  
39M5123  
39M5130  
39M5144  
39M5151  
39M5158  
39M5165  
39M5172  
39M5219  
39M5199  
39M5068  
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)  
ANZ 2.8M (models CTO 11M 12M)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Denmark 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G)  
S. Africa 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11M 11A 12G 12M 12A)  
UK 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11A 12G 12A)  
Switzerland 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G)  
Italy 2.8M (models CTO 11S 11L 11Y 11G 12S 12L 12Y 12G)  
Israel 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G)  
Korea 2.8M (models CTO)  
Japan 2.8M (models CTO 11J 12J)  
Argentina 2.8M (models CTO 11L 11Y 12L 12Y)  
39M5081  
US/Canada 2.8M (models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11A 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12A  
)
39M5226  
39M5179  
39M5233  
39M5206  
India 2.8M (models CTO)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Brazil 2.8M (models CTO)  
China 2.8M (models CTO)  
Table 20. Power cords, Type 6532  
Lenovo Power cord part  
number  
Used in these countries and regions  
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)  
39M5247  
39M5102  
39M5123  
39M5130  
39M5144  
39M5151  
39M5158  
39M5165  
39M5172  
39M5219  
39M5199  
39M5068  
39M5081  
ANZ 2.8M (models CTO 11M 12M)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Denmark 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G)  
S. Africa 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11M 11A 12G 12M 12A)  
UK 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11A 12G 12A)  
Switzerland 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G)  
Italy 2.8M (models CTO 11S 11L 11Y 11G 12S 12L 12Y 12G)  
Israel 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G)  
Korea 2.8M (models CTO)  
Japan 2.8M (models CTO 11J 12J)  
Argentina 2.8M (models CTO 11L 11Y 12L 12Y)  
US/Canada 2.8M (models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11A 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D  
12A)  
39M5226  
39M5179  
39M5233  
39M5247  
India 2.8M (models CTO)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Brazil 2.8M (models CTO)  
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 21. Power cords, Type 6533  
Lenovo Power cord part  
number  
Used in these countries and regions  
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)  
39M5247  
39M5102  
39M5123  
39M5130  
39M5144  
39M5151  
39M5158  
39M5165  
39M5172  
39M5219  
39M5199  
39M5068  
39M5081  
39M5226  
39M5179  
39M5233  
39M5247  
ANZ 2.8M (models CTO 11M)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Denmark 2.8M (models CTO 11G)  
S. Africa 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11M 11A)  
UK 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11A)  
Switzerland 2.8M (models CTO 11G)  
Italy 2.8M (models CTO 11G)  
Israel 2.8M (models CTO 11G)  
Korea 2.8M (models CTO)  
Japan 2.8M (models CTO 11J)  
Argentina 2.8M (models CTO)  
US/Canada 2.8M (models CTO 11A)  
India 2.8M (models CTO)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Brazil 2.8M (models CTO)  
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)  
Table 22. Power cords, Type 6534  
Lenovo Power cord part  
number  
Used in these countries and regions  
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)  
39M5247  
39M5102  
39M5123  
39M5130  
39M5144  
ANZ 2.8M (models CTO 11M 12M 13M 14M 15M)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Denmark 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G)  
S. Africa 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11M 11A 12G 12M 12A 13G 13M 13A 14G 14M  
14A 15G 15M 15A)  
39M5151  
39M5158  
39M5165  
UK 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11A 12G 12A 13G 13A 14G 14A 15G 15A)  
Switzerland 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G)  
Italy 2.8M (models CTO 11S 11L 11Y 11G 12S 12L 12Y 12G 13S 13L 13Y 13G 14S 14L  
14Y 14G 15G)  
39M5172  
39M5219  
39M5199  
39M5068  
39M5081  
Israel 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G)  
Korea 2.8M (models CTO)  
Japan 2.8M (models CTO 11J 12J 13J 14J 15J)  
Argentina 2.8M (models CTO 11L 11Y 12L 12Y 13L 13Y 14L 14Y)  
US/Canada 2.8M (models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11A 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12A  
13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13A 14U 14F 14S 14L 14D 14A 15A)  
39M5226  
39M5179  
39M5233  
India 2.8M (models CTO)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Brazil 2.8M (models CTO)  
196 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 22. Power cords, Type 6534 (continued)  
Lenovo Power cord part  
number  
Used in these countries and regions  
China 2.8M (models CTO)  
39M5206  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server  
The following configuration programs come with the server:  
v Setup Utility program  
The Setup Utility program is part of the UEFI. Use it to configure serial port assignments, change  
interrupt request (IRQ) settings, change the startup-device sequence, set the date and time, and set  
passwords.  
v Boot Manager program  
The Boot Manager program is part of the server firmware. Use it to override the startup sequence that  
is set in the Setup Utility and temporarily assign a device to be first in the startup sequence.  
v ThinkServer EasyStartup program  
This program simplifies the process of configuring your RAID controllers and installing your operating  
system. It is on the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD provided with your server. For details, see “Using the  
EasyStartup DVD” on page 209.  
v Integrated Management Module  
Use the integrated management module (IMM) for configuration, to update the firmware and sensor  
data record/field replaceable unit (SDR/FRU) data, and to remotely manage a network.  
v ThinkServer EasyManage products  
ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server and ThinkServer EasyManage Agent work together to provide  
centralized hardware and software inventory management and secure automated system management  
through a single console. See “Installing ThinkServer EasyManage software” on page 216.  
v Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture  
The remote presence and blue-screen capture feature are integrated into the Integrated Management  
Module (IMM). The virtual media key is required to enable the remote presence functions. When the  
optional virtual media key is installed in the server, it activates the remote presence functions. Without  
the virtual media key, you will not be able to access the network remotely to mount or unmount drives  
or images on the client system. However, you will still be able to access the Web interface without the  
virtual media key. You can order the optional Lenovo Virtual Media Key, if one did not come with  
your server. For more information about how to enable the remote presence function, see “Using the  
remote presence capability and blue-screen capture” on page 218.  
v LSI Configuration Utility program  
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure the integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID  
capabilities and the devices that are attached to it. For information about using this program, see  
“Using LSI Configuration Utility program” on page 206.  
v Ethernet controller configuration  
For information about configuring the Ethernet controller, see “Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet  
controllers” on page 219.  
v IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program  
Use this program as an alternative to the Setup utility for modifying UEFI settings and IMM settings.  
Use the ASU program online or out of band to modify UEFI settings from the command line without  
the need to restart the server to access the Setup utility. For more information about using this  
program, see .  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2007, 2009.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
 
Using the Setup Utility  
The Setup Utility program is part of the UEFI. You can use it to perform the following tasks:  
v View configuration information  
v View and change assignments for devices and I/O ports  
v Set the date and time  
v Set and change passwords  
v View and change the startup characteristics of the server and the order of startup devices  
(startup-drive sequence)  
v View and change settings for advanced hardware features  
v View and clear the event and error logs  
v Change interrupt request (IRQ) settings  
v Resolve configuration conflicts  
Starting the Setup Utility  
To start the Setup Utility, do the following:  
1. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to power, the power-control button  
becomes active.  
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an administrator password, you  
must type the administrator password to access the full Setup Utility menu. If you do not type the  
administrator password, a limited Setup Utility menu is available.  
3. Select settings to view or change.  
Setup Utility menu choices  
The following choices are on the Setup Utility main menu for the UEFI. Depending on the version of the  
firmware, some menu choices might differ slightly from these descriptions.  
v System Information  
Select this choice to view information about the server. When you make changes through other choices  
in the Setup Utility, some of those changes are reflected in the system information; you cannot change  
settings directly in the system information. This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
– System Summary  
Select this choice to view configuration information, including the ID, speed, and cache size of the  
microprocessors, machine type and model of the server, the serial number, the system UUID, and  
the amount of installed memory. When you make configuration changes through other options in  
the Setup Utility, the changes are reflected in the system summary; you cannot change settings  
directly in the system summary.  
– Product Data  
Select this choice to view the system-board identifier, the revision level or issue date of the  
firmware, the integrated management module and diagnostics code, and the version and date.  
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
v System Settings  
Select this choice to view or change the server component settings.  
– Processors  
Select this choice to view or change the processor settings.  
– Memory  
Select this choice to view or change the memory settings.  
200 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– Devices and I/O Ports  
Select this choice to view or change assignments for devices and input/output (I/O) ports. You can  
configure the serial ports; configure remote console redirection; enable or disable integrated Ethernet  
controllers, the SAS/SATA controller, SATA DVD drive channels, and PCI slots; and view the system  
Ethernet MAC addresses. If you disable a device, it cannot be configured, and the operating system  
will not be able to detect it (this is equivalent to disconnecting the device).  
– Power  
Select this choice to view or change power capping to control consumption, processors, and  
performance states.  
– Legacy Support  
Select this choice to view or set legacy support.  
- Force Legacy Video on Boot  
Select this choice to force INT video support, if the operating system does not support UEFI video  
output standards.  
- Rehook INT  
Select this choice to enable or disable devices from taking control of the boot process. The default  
is Disable.  
- Legacy Thunk Support  
Select this choice to enable or disable UEFI to interact with PCI mass storage devices that are  
non-UEFI compliant.  
– Integrated Management Module  
Select this choice to view or change the settings for the integrated management module.  
- POST Watchdog Timer  
Select this choice to view or enable the POST watchdog timer.  
- POST Watchdog Timer Value  
Select this choice to view or set the POST loader watchdog timer value.  
- Reboot System on NMI  
Enable or disable restarting the system whenever a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) occurs.  
Disabled is the default.  
- Commands on USB Interface Preference  
Select this choice to enable or disable the Ethernet over USB interface on IMM.  
- Network Configuration  
Select this choice to view the system management network interface port, the IMM MAC address,  
the current IMM IP address, and the host name; define the static IMM IP address, subnet mask,  
and gateway address; specify whether to use the static IP address or have DHCP assign the IMM  
IP address; save the network changes; and reset the IMM.  
- Reset IMM to Defaults  
Select this choice to view or reset IMM to the default settings.  
- Reset IMM  
Select this choice to reset IMM.  
– System Security  
Select this choice to view or configure Trusted Platform Module (TPM) support.  
– Adapters and UEFI Drivers  
Select this choice to view information about the UEFI 1.10 and UEFI 2.0 compliant controllers and  
drivers installed in the server.  
– Network  
Select this choice to view or configure the network device options, such as iSCSI, PXE, and network  
devices.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: The configuration forms for UEFI 2.1 and greater compliant add-on network devices might be  
located here.  
v Date and Time  
Select this choice to set the date and time in the server, in 24-hour format (hour:minute:second).  
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
v Start Options  
Select this choice to view or change the start options, including the startup sequence, keyboard  
NumLock state, PXE boot option, and PCI device boot priority. Changes in the startup options take  
effect when you start the server.  
The startup sequence specifies the order in which the server checks devices to find a boot record. The  
server starts from the first boot record that it finds. For example, you can define a startup sequence  
that checks for a disc in the DVD drive, then checks the hard disk drive, and then checks a network  
adapter.  
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
v Boot Manager  
Select this choice to view, add, delete, or change the device boot priority, boot from a file, select a  
one-time boot, or reset the boot order to the default setting.  
If the server has Wake on LAN hardware and software and the operating system supports Wake on  
LAN functions, you can specify a startup sequence for the Wake on LAN functions. For example, you  
can define a startup sequence that checks for a disc in the CD-RW/DVD drive, then checks the hard  
disk drive, and then checks a network adapter.  
v System Event Logs  
Select this choice to enter the System Event Manager, where you can view the error messages in the  
system event logs. You can use the arrow keys to move between pages in the error log.  
The system event logs contain all event and error messages that have been generated during POST, by  
the systems-management interface handler, and by the system service processor. Run the diagnostic  
programs to get more information about error codes that occur.  
Important: If the system-error LED on the front of the server is lit but there are no other error  
indications, clear the IMM system-event log. Also, after you complete a repair or correct an error, clear  
the IMM system-event log to turn off the system-error LED on the front of the server.  
– POST Event Viewer  
Select this choice to enter the POST event viewer to view the POST error messages.  
– System Event Log  
Select this choice to view the IMM system event log.  
– Clear System Event Log  
Select this choice to clear the IMM system event log.  
v User Security  
Select this choice to set, change, or clear passwords. See“Passwords” on page 203 for more information.  
This choice is on the full and limited Setup Utility menu.  
– Power-on Password  
Select this choice to set or change a power-on password. See “Power-on password” on page 203 for  
more information.  
– Administrator Password  
Select this choice to set or change an administrator password. An administrator password is  
intended to be used by a system administrator; it limits access to the full Setup Utility menu. If an  
administrator password is set, the full Setup Utility menu is available only if you type the  
administrator password at the password prompt. For more information, see “Administrator  
password” on page 204.  
v Save Settings  
202 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select this choice to save the changes that you have made in the settings.  
v Restore Settings  
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and restore the previous  
settings.  
v Load Default Settings  
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and restore the factory  
settings.  
v Exit Setup  
Select this choice to exit from the Setup Utility. If you have not saved the changes that you have made  
in the settings, you are asked whether you want to save the changes or exit without saving them.  
Passwords  
From the System Security choice, you can set, change, and delete a power-on password and an  
administrator password. The System Security choice is on the full Configuration/Setup Utility menu  
only.  
If you set only a power-on password, you must type the power-on password to complete the system  
startup; you have access to the full Configuration/Setup Utility menu.  
An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it limits access to the full  
Configuration/Setup Utility menu. If you set only an administrator password, you do not have to type a  
password to complete the system startup, but you must type the administrator password to access the  
Configuration/Setup Utility menu.  
If you set a power-on password for a user and an administrator password for a system administrator,  
you can type either password to complete the system startup. A system administrator who types the  
administrator password has access to the full Configuration/Setup Utility menu; the system administrator  
can give the user authority to set, change, and delete the power-on password. A user who types the  
power-on password has access to only the limited Configuration/Setup Utility menu; the user can set,  
change, and delete the power-on password, if the system administrator has given the user that authority.  
Power-on password  
If a power-on password is set, when you turn on the server, the system startup will not be completed  
until you type the power-on password. You can use any combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a -  
z, and 0 - 9) for the password.  
If a power-on password is set, you can enable the Unattended Start mode, in which the keyboard and  
mouse remain locked but the operating system can start. You can unlock the keyboard and mouse by  
typing the power-on password.  
If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the server in any of the following ways:  
v If an administrator password is set, type the administrator password at the password prompt (see  
“Administrator password” on page 204). Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and reset the  
power-on password.  
v Remove the battery from the server and then reinstall it. For instructions for removing the battery, see  
“Replacing the system-board battery” on page 151.  
v Change the position of the clear CMOS jumper on the system board to bypass the power-on password  
check. See “Power-on password” for additional information.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attention: Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn off the server; then,  
disconnect all power cords and external cables. See the safety information in “Important Safety  
Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained service technicians” on page 115. Do not change  
settings or move jumpers on any system-board switch or jumper block that is not shown in this  
document.  
Administrator password  
If an administrator password is set, you must type the administrator password for access to the full Setup  
utility menu. You can use any combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and 0 - 9) for the  
password.  
If you forget the administrator password, you can reset it after you change the position of the clear  
CMOS jumper.  
Resetting passwords  
If you forget the power-on password or administrator password, you can move the clear-CMOS jumper  
block on the system board to pins 2 and 3, to clear CMOS memory and bypass the power-on or  
administrator password check. The jumper location is shown in the following illustration.  
Table 23. System board jumpers  
Jumper number  
Jumper name  
Jumper setting  
JP1  
Clear CMOS jumper ꢀ1ꢁ  
v Pins 1 and 2: Keep CMOS data  
(default).  
v Pins 2 and 3: Clear CMOS data  
(including power-on password and  
administrator password)  
JP6  
Boot block jumper ꢀ2ꢁ  
v Pins 1 and 2: Boot from primary  
BIOS page (default) .  
v Pins 2 and 3: Boot from backup  
BIOS page.  
204 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 23. System board jumpers (continued)  
Jumper number  
Jumper name  
Jumper setting  
Notes:  
1. If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1 and 2.  
2. Changing the position of the UEFI boot recovery jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 before the server is  
turned on alters which flash ROM page is loaded. Do not change the jumper pin position after the server is  
turned on. This can cause an unpredictable problem.  
Using the Boot Manager program  
The Boot Manager program is a built-in, menu-driven configuration utility program that you can use to  
temporarily redefine the first startup device without changing settings in the Setup Utility.  
To use the Boot Manager program, do the following:  
1. Turn off the server.  
2. Restart the server.  
3. When the prompt <F12> Select Boot Device is displayed, press F12. If a bootable USB mass storage  
device is installed, a submenu item (USB Key/Disk) is displayed.  
4. Use the Up arrow and Down arrow keys to select an item from the Boot Selection Menu and press  
Enter. The server attempts to boot from the selected device.  
The next time the server starts, it returns to the startup sequence that is set in the Setup Utility.  
Configuring RAID controllers  
The following table lists the various utilities available to configure RAID controllers before an operating  
system is installed.  
Table 24. RAID configuration utilities  
Where to find more  
RAID configuration utility Description  
Location  
information  
EasyStartup RAID  
configuration utility  
EasyStartup DVD  
“Using the EasyStartup  
DVD” on page 209  
v For use with all  
factory-supported RAID  
controllers except  
ServeRAID-BR10i  
v Automatically detects  
hardware and lists all  
supported RAID  
configurations  
v Configures one or more  
disk arrays per controller  
depending on the number  
of drives attached to the  
controller and the RAID  
level selected  
v Supports hot-spare drives  
v Creates a RAID response  
file that can be used to  
configure RAID controllers  
on similarly configured  
Lenovo servers.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 24. RAID configuration utilities (continued)  
Where to find more  
information  
RAID configuration utility Description  
Location  
MegaRAID BIOS  
Configuration Utility  
(WebBIOS)  
For:  
In system firmware. To  
access:  
“Using the WebBIOS  
utility” on page 208  
v IBM ServeRAID-BR10il  
SAS/SATA Controller  
v Use UEFI Setup Utility.  
v IBM ServeRAID-MR10i  
v Press Ctrl + H at the  
WebBIOS prompt  
during startup.  
SAS/SATA Controller  
v IBM ServeRAID-M1015  
SAS/SATA controller  
LSI Configuration Utility  
For:  
In system firmware. To  
access:  
“Using LSI Configuration  
Utility program”  
v IBM ServeRAID-BR10il  
SAS/SATA Controller  
v Use UEFI Setup Utility.  
v IBM ServeRAID-MR10i  
v Press Ctrl + C at the LSI  
SAS/SATA Controller  
prompt during startup.  
v IBM ServeRAID-M1015  
SAS/SATA controller  
Using LSI Configuration Utility program  
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage redundant array of independent  
disks (RAID) arrays. Be sure to use this program as described in this document.  
v Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to perform the following tasks:  
– Perform a low-level format on a hard disk drive  
– Create an array of hard disk drives with or without a hot-spare drive  
– Set protocol parameters on hard disk drives  
The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports RAID arrays. You can use the LSI  
Configuration Utility program to configure RAID 1 (IM), RAID 1E (IME), and RAID 0 (IS) for a single  
pair of attached devices. If you install a different type of RAID controller, follow the instructions in the  
documentation that comes with the adapter to view or change settings for attached devices.  
When you are using the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage arrays, consider the  
following information:  
v The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports the following features:  
– Integrated Mirroring (IM) with hot-spare support (also known as RAID 1)  
Use this option to create an integrated array of two disks plus up to two optional hot spares. All  
data on the primary disk can be migrated.  
– Integrated Mirroring Enhanced (IME) with hot-spare support (also known as RAID 1E)  
Use this option to create an integrated mirror enhanced array of three to eight disks, including up to  
two optional hot spares. All data on the array disks will be deleted.  
– Integrated Striping (IS) (also known as RAID 0)  
Use this option to create an integrated striping array of two to eight disks. All data on the array  
disks will be deleted.  
v Hard disk drive capacities affect how you create arrays. The drives in an array can have different  
capacities, but the RAID controller treats them as if they all have the capacity of the smallest hard disk  
drive.  
v If you use an integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities to configure a RAID 1 (mirrored)  
array after you have installed the operating system, you will lose access to any data or applications  
that were previously stored on the secondary drive of the mirrored pair.  
206 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v If you install a different type of RAID controller, see the documentation that comes with the controller  
for information about viewing and changing settings for attached devices.  
Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program  
To start the LSI Configuration Utility program, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the power-control  
button becomes active.  
2. When the prompt <F1 Setup> is displayed, press F1. If you have set an administrator password, you  
are prompted to type the password.  
3. Select System Settings → Adapters and UEFI drivers.  
4. Select Please refresh this page on the first visit and press Enter.  
5. Select LSI controller_driver_name Driver and press Enter, where controller_driver_name is the name of the  
SAS/SATA controller driver. For the SAS/SATA controller driver name, see the documentation that  
comes with your controller.  
6. To perform storage-management tasks, follow the procedures in the documentation that comes with  
the SAS/SATA controller.  
When you have finished changing settings, press Esc to exit from the program; select Save to save the  
settings that you have changed.  
Formatting a hard disk drive  
Low-level formatting removes all data from the hard disk. If there is data on the disk that you want to  
save, back up the hard disk before you perform this procedure.  
Note: Before you format a hard disk, make sure that the disk is not part of a mirrored pair.  
To format a drive, complete the following steps:  
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drive that you want to format and  
press Enter.  
2. Select SAS Topology and press Enter.  
3. Select Direct Attach Devices and press Enter.  
4. To highlight the drive that you want to format, use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys. To scroll  
left and right, use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys or the End key. Press Alt+D.  
5. To start the low-level formatting operation, select Format and press Enter.  
Creating a RAID array of hard disk drives  
To create a RAID array of hard disk drives, complete the following steps:  
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drives that you want to mirror.  
2. Select RAID Properties.  
3. Select the type of array that you want to create.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the first drive in the pair; then, press the Minus (-) or Plus (+) key to  
change the mirror value to Primary.  
5. Continue to select the next drive using the Minus (-) or Plus (+) key until you have selected all the  
drives for your array.  
6. Press C to create the disk array.  
7. Select Apply changes and exit menu to create the array.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the WebBIOS utility  
The WebBIOS configuration utility enables you to create and manage RAID configurations on LSI SAS  
controllers. The WebBIOS utility resides in the SAS controller BIOS and operates independently of the  
operating system. The WebBIOS utility provides a configuration wizard to guide you through the  
configuration of virtual disks and physical arrays.  
Starting the WebBIOS utility  
Perform the following steps to start the WebBIOS utility and access the main menu:  
1. After you turn on the power and when the computer is starting, you are prompted to press Ctrl + H  
when the following message is displayed:  
Copyright© LSI Logic Corporation  
Press <Ctrl><H> for WebBIOS  
2. Select a controller from the list.  
3. Click Start. The main WebBIOS utility interface is displayed. You can toggle between the physical  
view and logical view of the storage devices that are connected to the controller. Click Physical View  
or Logical View on the menu in the left pane to change the view.  
Main menu of the WebBIOS utility  
The main menu includes the following options:  
Adapter Properties  
From this view, you can display and modify the properties of the SAS controller that is currently  
selected.  
Scan Devices  
From this view, you can re-scan the physical and virtual disks for any changes in the drive status  
or physical configuration.  
Virtual Disks  
From this view, you can display and modify the virtual disk properties, delete virtual disks,  
initialize disks, and perform other tasks.  
Physical Drives  
From this view, you can view the physical drive properties, create hot spare disks, and perform  
other tasks.  
Configuration Wizard  
Select this to start the Configuration Wizard and create a new storage configuration, clear a  
configuration, or add a new configuration.  
Adapter Selection  
From this view, you can select a different SAS adapter. Then, you can view information about the  
adapter and the drives connected to it, or create a new configuration for the adapter.  
Physical View or Logical View  
Select this to toggle between the Physical View and Logical View.  
Events  
From this view, you can display the system events in the Event Information page.  
Exit  
Select this to exit the WebBIOS utility and continue with the system boot.  
Creating a storage configuration using the Configuration Wizard  
Follow these steps to start create a storage configuration:  
1. Click Configuration Wizard to start the wizard.  
2. Select a configuration option:  
208 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attention: If you select Clear Configuration or New Configuration, all existing data in the  
configuration is deleted. Make a backup copy of any data that you want to keep before selecting these  
options.  
Clear Configuration  
Clears the existing configuration.  
New Configuration  
Clears the existing configuration and lets you create a new configuration.  
Add Configuration  
Retains the existing storage configuration and adds new drives to it (this does not cause any  
data loss).  
3. Click Next.  
4. Select a configuration mode from the following options:  
Custom Configuration  
In this mode, you can control all attributes of the new storage configuration.  
Auto Configuration and Redundancy  
This mode automatically creates an optimal RAID 1 or RAID 5 configuration, providing data  
redundancy.  
Auto Configuration without Redundancy  
This mode automatically creates a non-redundant RAID 0 configuration.  
5. Click Next to continue.  
Viewing and changing properties  
You can view information for one LSI SAS at a time. If your system has multiple LSI SAS adapters, you  
can view information for a different adapter, click Adapter Selection on the main view. To view the  
properties for the currently selected adapter, click Adapter Properties on the main WebBIOS screen.  
Viewing and changing virtual disk properties  
On the WebBIOS main screen, select a virtual disk from the list and click Virtual Disk.  
The Properties panel displays the RAID level, state, size, and stripe size.  
The Policies panel lists the virtual disk policies that were defined when the storage configuration was  
created. To change any of these policies, select a policy from the menu and click Change. The Operations  
panel lists operations that can be performed on the virtual disk. Select the operation and click Go. Then  
choose from the following operations:  
v Select Del to delete this virtual disk.  
v Select Locate and the LEDs flash on the physical drives used by this virtual disk.  
v Select Fast or Slow to initialize this virtual disk.  
Attention: Before you run an initialization, back up any data on the virtual disk that you want to  
save. All data on the virtual disk is lost when you initialize it.  
Using the EasyStartup DVD  
The EasyStartup DVD simplifies the process of configuring your RAID controllers and installing an  
operating system. The program works in conjunction with your Windows or Linux operating-system  
installation disc to automate the process of installing the operating system and associated device drivers.  
If you did not receive an EasyStartup DVD with your server, you can download an image from the  
Lenovo Support Web site at: http://www.lenovo.com/support  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The EasyStartup program has the following features:  
v Self-booting DVD  
v Easy-to-use, language-selectable interface  
v Integrated help system  
v Automatic hardware detection  
v RAID configuration utility  
v Device drivers (based on the server model and detected devices)  
v Selectable partition size and file system type  
v Support for Windows, Red Hat, and SUSE Server operating systems  
v Installs the operating system and device drivers in an unattended mode to save time  
v Creates a reusable response file that can be used with similarly configured Lenovo servers to make  
future installations even faster  
Before you use the EasyStartup DVD  
Functionality and supported operating systems can vary with different versions of the EasyStartup  
program. To learn more about the version you have, do the following:  
1. Insert the EasyStartup DVD and restart the server.  
2. Advance to the Home screen.  
3. Click Compatibility notes. The compatibility notes feature provides detailed information about the  
RAID controllers, operating systems, and server configurations supported by that version of the  
EasyStartup program.  
4. Click User Guide. The user guide provides an overview of the various functions provided by that  
version of the EasyStartup program.  
Before using the EasyStartup program to install an operating system, make sure any external storage  
devices and fiber channels are configured correctly.  
EasyStartup overview  
The EasyStartup program requires a supported Lenovo server with an enabled, startable (bootable) DVD  
drive. In addition to the EasyStartup DVD, you also must have the operating-system installation CD or  
DVD and the product key or installation number for the operating system (if provided).  
The EasyStartup program performs the following tasks:  
v Detects installed hardware devices  
v Guides you through the process of configuring one or more RAID controllers  
v Guides you through the process of creating a response file for the unattended installation of the  
operating system  
v Enables you to create scripts or commands that run at the end of the operating system installation  
process  
v Facilitates the installation of the ThinkServer EasyManage products and DVD-burning software  
(Windows installation only)  
v Prepares the hard disk for installation  
v Prompts you to insert the operating-system installation disc  
v Initiates an unattended installation of the operating system and device drivers  
Setup and configuration  
When you start the EasyStartup DVD, you will be prompted for the following:  
v Select the language in which you want to view the program.  
v Select the language of the keyboard you will be using with the program.  
210 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The following language keyboards are supported: English, Dutch, French, German, Italian,  
Japanese, Spanish, and Turkish.  
You will then see one or more reminders about configuring storage devices, and then you will be  
presented with the Lenovo License Agreement. Read the license agreement carefully. You must agree with  
terms in order to continue.  
After agreeing to the license agreement, you will be given the following choices:  
v Continue to the main program interface  
v Use a shortcut to install an operating system based on a response file that you previously created using  
the EasyStartup program  
v Use a short cut to configure RAID controllers based on a RAID response file that you previously  
created using the EasyStartup program  
If you continue to the main program interface, you will have the following selectable options:  
v Compatibility notes: This selection provides information about the RAID controllers, operating  
systems, and server configurations supported by that version of the EasyStartup program.  
v User Guide: This selection provides information about the features provided by that version of the  
EasyStartup program.  
v Hardware list: This selection displays a list of hardware devices detected by the EasyStartup program.  
v Configure RAID: This selection enables you to view the current RAID configuration for each installed  
RAID controller and make changes if needed.  
v Install operating system: This selection displays a series of choices and prompts to collect information  
required for installation, prepares the hard disk for installation, and then initiates the installation  
process using the user-provided operating-system installation CD or DVD.  
v About: This selection displays version information and legal notices.  
Configuring RAID  
The RAID configuration feature that is part of the EasyStartup program enables you to view and change  
RAID settings for supported RAID controllers. Through this feature, you have the ability to configure  
each installed controller. The program automatically detects the number of discs currently attached to the  
controller, determines the possible RAID configurations that can be configured, and prompts you through  
the steps to configure one or more disc arrays with or without hot-spare drives. As you configure each  
controller you will be given the option to save the RAID configuration settings to a RAID response file,  
which you can use on other similarly configured Lenovo servers. This method satisfies most users’ needs.  
Note: The EasyStartup program provides limited support for the IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA  
Controller. You must use the LSI Configuration Utility to configure the disc array for this controller.  
However, after the disc arrays are configured, you can use the EasyStartup program to install the  
operating system and associated device driver. See “Using LSI Configuration Utility program” on page  
206 for details.  
Typical operating system installation  
When you select Install operating system, you will be prompted for information required for the  
installation. The prompts vary depending on the operating system selected. This section describes the  
tasks associated with a typical Windows operating system installation. Each task must be completed in  
order before moving to the next task.  
Note: Ensure that your RAID controller is correctly configured before you select an operating system to  
install.  
v Select operating system: This task enables you to select the operating system that you will be  
installing.  
v Select disk: This task enables you to select the disk where you want to install the operating system.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: The disk that you select must be set as the boot disk in UEFI.  
v Partitions options: This task enables you to choose whether you want to repartition the selected drive  
or use an existing partition.  
v Partition settings: This task enables you to choose the file system type and define the partition size.  
v Installation settings: This task prompts you for user and system settings, the operating system product  
key, and the administrator password.  
v Network settings: This task prompts you for domain and workgroup settings, Ethernet controller type,  
IP address settings, DNS settings, and WINS address settings.  
v Install applications: This task enables you to run custom commands or scripts at the end of the  
installation process. It also facilitates the installation of DVD-burning software and ThinkServer  
EasyManage software products.  
v Install Windows components: This task enables you to install optional Windows components such as  
IIS, ASP.NET, and SNMP.  
v Confirm settings: This task enables you to review all of the information you provided.  
v Save response file: This task gives you the option of saving the information on a diskette or USB  
device as a response file for future installations on similarly configured Lenovo servers.  
v Start installation: This task starts the actual installation process. First, the disk is prepared using the  
disk and partition information you specified. Then you are prompted to insert the operating system  
disk, and the operating system is installed using the information that you specified.  
Installing your operating system without using EasyStartup  
If you have already configured the server hardware and you are not using the EasyStartup program to  
install your operating system, do the following to download the latest operating-system installation  
instructions from the Lenovo Support Web site:  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual procedure might vary slightly  
from what is described in this document.  
1. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage from the  
Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210, and click Continue.  
4. Select the operating system that you want from the Operating system list, and click Continue.  
5. Click Operating system installation to download instructions to install the operating system.  
Updating the firmware  
The firmware in the server is periodically updated and is available for download on the Lenovo Support  
Web site. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for the latest level of firmware, such as unified  
extensible firmware interface (UEFI) code, vital product data (VPD) code, device drivers, and service  
processor firmware.  
When you replace a device in the server, you might have to either update the server with the latest  
version of the firmware that is stored in memory on the device or restore the pre-existing firmware from  
a diskette or CD image.  
v UEFI code is stored in programmable ROM (flash memory) on the system board.  
v IMM firmware is stored in ROM on the baseboard management controller on the system board.  
v Ethernet firmware is stored in ROM on the Ethernet controller.  
v ServeRAID firmware is stored in ROM on the RAID controller.  
v Major components contain VPD code. You can use the IBM Advanced Settings Utility program to  
update the VPD code (see “IBM Advanced Settings Utility program” on page 216).  
212 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following items are downloadable at http://www.lenovo.com/support:  
v Diagnostics programs  
v IMM firmware  
v Ethernet firmware  
Using the EasyUpdate Firmware Updater tool  
ThinkServer EasyUpdate Firmware Updater is a software application that enables you to maintain your  
system firmware up to date and helps you avoid unnecessary outages. Firmware Updater updates the  
server firmware in two steps, by updating system firmware, adapter firmware, and hard disk drive  
(HDD) firmware.  
To update your system, first go to the Lenovo Support Web site and obtain the ISO file.  
1. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage from the  
Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210, and click Continue.  
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
5. Download the ThinkServer firmware update media ISO file.  
6. Burn the ISO image on to a CD or DVD.  
7. Insert the media in the server DVD drive, and start the server to that drive.  
8. The application starts automatically. Hardware detection runs, and a list of applicable firmware  
updates is displayed.  
Note: You need to boot the CD or DVD two times; one time to update the system and adapter  
firmware and one time to update the HDD firmware.  
9. Select the firmware updates that you want to install.  
Before distributing the firmware update to other servers, ensure that your server can restart successfully  
without encountering hardware problems.  
Starting the backup server firmware  
The system board contains a backup copy area for the server firmware. This is a secondary copy of the  
server firmware that you update only during the process of updating the server firmware. If the primary  
copy of the server firmware becomes damaged, use this backup copy.  
To force the server to start from the backup copy, turn off the server; then, place the JP6 jumper in the  
backup position (pins 2 and 3).  
Use the backup copy of the server firmware until the primary copy is restored. After the primary copy is  
restored, turn off the server; then, move the JP6 jumper back to the primary position (pins 1 and 2).  
Recovering the UEFI firmware  
If the UEFI firmware has become damaged, such as from a power failure during an update, you can  
recover the UEFI firmware using the boot block jumper and a UEFI recovery diskette.  
The system board contains a backup copy area for the server firmware. This is a secondary copy of the  
server firmware that you update only during the process of updating the server firmware. If the primary  
copy of the server firmware becomes damaged, use this backup copy.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To force the server to start from the backup copy, turn off the server; then, place jumper JP6 in the  
backup position (pins 2 and 3).  
v Pins 1 and 2: Boot from primary BIOS page (default) .  
v Pins 2 and 3: Boot from backup BIOS page.  
Use the backup copy of the server firmware until the primary copy is restored. After the primary copy is  
restored, turn off the server; then, move jumper JP6 back to the primary position (pins 1 and 2).  
The following table describes the jumpers on the system board.  
Table 25. System board jumpers  
Jumper number  
Jumper name  
Jumper setting  
JP1  
Clear CMOS jumper ꢀ1ꢁ  
v Pins 1 and 2: Keep CMOS data  
(default).  
v Pins 2 and 3: Clear CMOS data  
(including power-on password and  
administrator password)  
JP6  
Boot block jumper ꢀ2ꢁ  
v Pins 1 and 2: Boot from primary  
BIOS page (default) .  
v Pins 2 and 3: Boot from backup  
BIOS page.  
Notes:  
1. If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1 and 2.  
2. Changing the position of the UEFI boot recovery jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 before the server is  
turned on alters which flash ROM page is loaded. Do not change the jumper pin position after the server is  
turned on. This can cause an unpredictable problem.  
214 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the integrated management module  
The integrated management module (IMM) is a second generation of the functions that were formerly  
provided by the baseboard management controller hardware. It combines service processor functions,  
video controller, and (when an optional virtual media key is installed) remote presence function in a  
single chip.  
The IMM supports the following basic systems-management features:  
v Environmental monitor with fan speed control for temperature, voltages, fan failure, and power supply  
failure.  
v DIMM error assistance. The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) disables a failing DIMM that  
is detected during POST, and the IMM lights the associated system error LED and the failing DIMM  
error LED.  
v System-event log (SEL).  
v ROM-based IMM firmware flash updates.  
v Auto Boot Failure Recovery (ABR).  
v A virtual media key, which enables remote presence support (remote video, remote keyboard/mouse,  
and remote storage).  
v Nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) detection and reporting.  
v Automatic Server Restart (ASR) when POST is not complete or the operating system hangs and the  
operating system watchdog timer times-out. The IMM might be configured to watch for the operating  
system watchdog timer and reboot the system after a timeout, if the ASR feature is enabled. Otherwise,  
the IMM allows the administrator to generate a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) by pressing an NMI  
button on the system board for an operating-system memory dump. ASR is supported by IPMI.  
v Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Specification V2.0 and Intelligent Platform  
Management Bus (IPMB) support.  
v Invalid system configuration (CNFG) LED support.  
v Serial port redirection over Telnet or SSH.  
v Serial over LAN (SOL).  
v Query power-supply input power.  
v PECI 2 support.  
v Power/reset control (power-on, hard and soft shutdown, hard and soft reset, schedule power control).  
v Alerts (in-band and out-of-band alerting, PET traps - IPMI style, SNMP, e-mail).  
v Operating-system failure blue screen capture.  
v Command-line interface.  
v Configuration save and restore.  
v PCI configuration data.  
v Boot sequence manipulation.  
The IMM also provides the following remote server management capabilities through the OSA SMBridge  
management utility program:  
v Command-line interface (IPMI Shell)  
The command-line interface provides direct access to server management functions through the IPMI  
2.0 protocol. Use the command-line interface to issue commands to control the server power, view  
system information, and identify the server. You can also save one or more commands as a text file and  
run the file as a script.  
v Serial over LAN  
Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote location. You can  
remotely view and change the UEFI settings, restart the server, identify the server, and perform other  
management functions. Any standard Telnet client application can access the SOL connection.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IBM Advanced Settings Utility program  
The IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program is an alternative to the UEFI Setup Utility program for  
modifying UEFI settings. Use the ASU program online or out of band to modify UEFI settings from the  
command line without the need to restart the system to access the UEFI Setup Utility program.  
You also can use the ASU program to configure the optional remote presence features or other IMM  
settings. The remote presence features provide enhanced systems-management capabilities.  
In addition, the ASU program provides limited settings for configuring the IPMI function in the IMM  
through the command-line interface.  
Use the command-line interface to issue setup commands. You can save any of the settings as a file and  
run the file as a script. The ASU program supports scripting environments through a batch-processing  
mode.  
Installing ThinkServer EasyManage software  
You can install the ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server program from the ThinkServer EasyManage CD  
or you can download and install the program from http://www.lenovo.com/support. After one instance  
of the ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server has been installed, you can use the ThinkServer EasyManage  
Agent installer to install the agent on other servers and clients on the network.  
Also, the ThinkServer EasyStartup program provides an option to either install the ThinkServer  
EasyManage Agent as part of the operating system installation process or install a desktop icon to assist  
with the installation of the ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server after the operating system has been  
installed.  
Installation requirements  
Before installing ThinkServer EasyManage software on your server, your environment must meet the  
following requirements:  
v Microsoft® Windows Server 2008 is installed on the server where you intend to install the Core Server.  
v The original Windows Server operating system installation CDs are available in case files are needed  
while installing the prerequisites.  
v The server has Internet access to obtain prerequisites and to activate the software after the installation  
is complete.  
v The server has a static IP address.  
v The server is not a domain controller. However, it is recommended to have the server join a domain.  
v The account that you use to log in and to install the Core Server has Administrator privileges on the  
server with full read/write access. Ideally, this account is also a Domain Administrator account. This  
account will be used to create the initial administrator-level account used to log in to the ThinkServer  
EasyManage console.  
v Any previous agent from EasyManage or LANDesk must be removed prior to installing the Core  
Server and Management Console.  
Installation order  
The order in which you install the operating system and Windows Components is critical to install  
ThinkServer EasyManage software successfully. To ensure a clean, working installation of ThinkServer  
EasyManage software, use the following installation order:  
1. Install Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32-bit with the latest Service Pack.  
2. Install the Windows Components: See “Installing Windows 2008 32-bit components” on page 217.  
3. Use Windows Update to install all available critical updates.  
216 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Download Microsoft Web Services Enhancement 2.0 Service Pack 3 (LANDesk Process Manager only)  
from the following Web site: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=1ba1f631-  
c3e7-420a-bc1e-ef18bab66122&DisplayLang=en. Install the software using the default settings.  
Note: This specific version is required.  
5. Use Windows Update to install all available critical updates.  
6. Launch the EasyManage installation.  
7. After ThinkServer EasyManage is installed, enable Security and Patch Manager to obtain the  
LANDesk 8.8 Software Updates. In the console application, click Help -> LANDesk -> Security  
Updates for a guide to configuring Security and Patch Manager.  
8. Install Adobe® Flash Player 9 if you plan to use the Management Console functions from the same  
server on which the Core Server is installed. You can obtain Adobe Flash Player 9 from the Adobe  
Web site: http://www.adobe.com/products/flashplayer/  
Installing Windows 2008 32-bit components  
To install the Windows Server 2008 32-bit components necessary for a ThinkServer EasyManage core  
server installation, complete the steps in this section.  
Installing Web Server Role (IIS)  
To install the Web Server Role (IIS), do the following:  
1. Click Start -> Server Manager.  
2. Under Roles Summary, click Add Roles. The Add Roles wizard appears.  
3. Click Next.  
4. Select the checkbox next to Web Server (IIS). A dialog box displays the additional features that are  
required.  
5. Click Add Required Features, then click Next. In the list of additional role services that can be  
installed, ensure that the following are selected:  
v HTTP Redirection  
v Static Content  
v ASP.NET  
v ASP  
v CGI  
v Server Side Includes  
v Windows Authentication  
v IIS 6 Metabase Compatibility  
Note: When you select ASP.Net or ASP, a dialog box displays the additional role services required.  
Click Add Required Role Services.  
6. Click Install.  
Note: If IIS is already installed and certain Role Services are still required, expand Roles in the tree  
view on the left in Server Manager and click on Web Server (IIS), then click on Add Role Services.  
Select the necessary role services and click Install.  
Installing Microsoft SNMP services  
To install Microsoft SNMP services, do the following:  
1. Click Add Features in the Features Summary section on the main page of Server Manager.  
2. Select the SNMP Services checkbox.  
3. Click Next, then Install.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Uninstalling the LANDesk Software Agent  
If the Core Server has LANDesk agents on it from a previous Management Suite release, it will fail the  
autorun prerequisite check. You must remove the old agents by running uninstallwinclient.exe file from  
the \Program Files\LANDesk\ManagementSuite folder.  
Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture  
The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of the integrated  
management module (IMM). When the optional Lenovo Virtual Media Key is installed in the server, it  
activates the remote presence functions. The virtual media key is required to enable the integrated remote  
presence and blue-screen capture features. Without the virtual media key, you will not be able to access  
the network remotely to mount or unmount drives or images on the client system. However, you can still  
access the Web interface without the key.  
After the virtual media key is installed in the server, it is authenticated to determine whether it is valid. If  
the key is not valid, you receive a message from the Web interface (when you attempt to start the remote  
presence feature) indicating that the hardware key is required to use the remote presence feature.  
The virtual media key has an LED. When this LED is lit and green, it indicates that the key is installed  
and functioning correctly. When the LED is not lit, it indicates that the key might not be installed  
correctly.  
The remote presence feature provides the following functions:  
v Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1280 x 1024 at 75 Hz, regardless of the system  
state  
v Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote client  
v Mapping the DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a remote client, and mapping ISO and  
diskette image files as virtual drives that are available for use by the server  
v Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server as a virtual drive  
The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the IMM restarts the server  
when the IMM detects an operating-system hang condition. A system administrator can use the  
blue-screen capture to assist in determining the cause of the hang condition.  
Enabling the remote presence feature  
To enable the remote presence feature, complete the following steps:  
1. Install the virtual media key into the dedicated slot on the system board (see “Installing the virtual  
media key” on page 167).  
2. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the power-control  
button becomes active.  
Obtaining the IP address for the IMM  
To access the Web interface, you need the IP address for the IMM. You can obtain the IMM IP address  
through the Setup utility. The server comes with a default IP address for the IMM of 192.168.70.125. To  
locate the IP address, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the power-control  
button becomes active.  
218 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. (This prompt is displayed on the screen for only  
a few seconds. You must press F1 quickly.) If you have set both a power-on password and an  
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the full Setup utility  
menu.  
3. From the Setup utility main menu, select System Settings.  
4. On the next screen, select Integrated Management Module.  
5. On the next screen, select Network Configuration.  
6. Find the IP address and write it down.  
7. Exit from the Setup utility.  
Logging on to the Web interface  
To log on to the Web interface to use the remote presence functions, complete the following steps:  
1. Open a Web browser and in the address or URL field, type the IP address or host name of the IMM  
to which you want to connect.  
Note: The IMM defaults to DHCP. If a DHCP host is not available, the IMM assigns a static IP  
address of 192.168.70.125.  
2. On the Login page, type the user name and password. If you are using the IMM for the first time,  
you can obtain the user name and password from your system administrator. All login attempts are  
documented in the event log.  
Note: The IMM is set initially with a user name of USERID and password of PASSW0RD (passw0rd  
with a zero, not a the letter O). You have read/write access. You must change the default password  
the first time you log on.  
3. On the Welcome page, type a timeout value (in minutes) in the field that is provided. The IMM will  
log you off of the Web interface if your browser is inactive for the number of minutes that you  
entered for the timeout value.  
4. Click Continue to start the session. The System Health page provides a quick view of the system  
status.  
Enabling the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program  
The Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program is part of the server firmware. You can use it to configure the  
network as a startable device, and you can customize where the network startup option appears in the  
startup sequence. Enable and disable the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program from the Setup utility.  
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controllers  
The Ethernet controllers are integrated on the system board. They provide an interface for connecting to a  
10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1 Gbps network and provide full-duplex (FDX) capability, which enables  
simultaneous transmission and reception of data on the network. If the Ethernet ports in the server  
support auto-negotiation, the controllers detect the data-transfer rate (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or  
1000BASE-T) and duplex mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) of the network and automatically operate at  
that rate and mode.  
You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controllers. However, you must install a device  
driver to enable the operating system to address the controllers. For device drivers and information about  
configuring the Ethernet controllers, see the Intel Hartwell 82574L Gigabit Ethernet Software CD that comes  
with the server. To find updated information about configuring the controllers, complete the following  
steps.  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual procedure might vary slightly  
from what is described in this document.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage from the  
Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210, and click Continue.  
Enabling and configuring Serial over LAN (SOL)  
Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote location. You can  
remotely view and change the BIOS settings, restart the server, identify the server, and perform other  
management functions. Any standard Telnet client application can access the SOL connection.  
To enable and configure the server for SOL, you must update and configure the UEFI code; update and  
configure the integrated management module (IMM) firmware; update and configure the Ethernet  
controller firmware; and enable the operating system for an SOL connection.  
UEFI update and configuration  
To update and configure the UEFI code to enable SOL, complete the following steps:  
1. Update the UEFI code:  
a. Download the latest version of the UEFI code from http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b. Update the UEFI code, following the instructions that come with the update file that you  
downloaded.  
2. Update the IMM firmware:  
a. Download the latest version of the IMM firmware from http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b. Update the IMM firmware, following the instructions that come with the update file that you  
downloaded.  
3. Configure the UEFI settings:  
a. When you are prompted to start the Configuration/Setup Utility program, restart the server and  
press F1.  
b. Select System Settings → Devices and I/O Ports.  
c. Select Console Redirection Settings; then, make sure that the values are set as follows:  
v COM Port 1: Enable  
v Remote Console: Enable  
v Serial Port Sharing: Enable  
v Serial Port Access Mode: Dedicated COM1 Settings  
v Baud Rate: 115200  
v Data Bits: 8  
v Parity: None Stop  
v Bits: 1  
v Thermal Emulation: ANSI  
v Active After Boot: Enable  
v Flow Control: Hardware  
d. Press Esc twice to exit the Devices and I/O Ports section of the Configuration/Setup Utility  
program.  
e. Select Save Settings; then, press Enter.  
f. Press Enter to confirm.  
g. Select Exit Setup; then, press Enter.  
h. Make sure that Yes, exit the Setup Utility is selected; then, press Enter.  
220 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix. Notices  
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries.  
Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available  
in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply  
that only that Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,  
program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead.  
However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product,  
program, or service.  
Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this  
document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send  
license inquiries, in writing, to:  
Lenovo (United States), Inc.  
1009 Think Place - Building One  
Morrisville, NC 27560  
U.S.A.  
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing  
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some  
jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore,  
this statement may not apply to you.  
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically  
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.  
Lenovo may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in  
this publication at any time without notice.  
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support  
applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in  
this document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this  
document shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property  
rights of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific  
environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments  
may vary.  
Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate  
without incurring any obligation to you.  
Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not  
in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part  
of the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.  
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the  
result obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have  
been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the  
same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through  
extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their  
specific environment.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2007, 2009.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
 
Trademarks  
The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:  
Lenovo  
Lenovo logo  
ThinkServer  
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States,  
other countries, or both:  
IBM®  
ServeRAID™  
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.  
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or  
both.  
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.  
Red Hat, the Red Hat “Shadow Man” logo, and all Red Hat-based trademarks and logos are trademarks  
or registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc., in the United States and other countries.  
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.  
Important notes  
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other factors also affect  
application performance.  
DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often less than the possible  
maximum.  
When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume, KB stands for 1024  
bytes, MB stands for 1 048 576 bytes, and GB stands for 1 073 741 824 bytes.  
When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands for 1 000 000 bytes,  
and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible capacity can vary depending on operating  
environments.  
Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any standard hard disk drives  
and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest currently supported drives that are available  
from Lenovo.  
Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an optional memory  
module.  
Lenovo makes no representation or warranties regarding non-Lenovo products and services, including  
but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. These  
products are offered and warranted solely by third parties.  
Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not include user manuals or all  
program functionality.  
222 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Product recycling and disposal  
This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national regulations. Lenovo  
encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment  
when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment  
owners in recycling their IT products. Information on Lenovo product recycling offerings can be found on  
Lenovo’s Internet site at  
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment/recycling.  
Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la normativa nacional o local  
aplicable. Lenovo recomienda a los propietarios de equipos de tecnología de la información (TI) que  
reciclen responsablemente sus equipos cuando éstos ya no les sean útiles. Lenovo dispone de una serie de  
programas y servicios de devolución de productos, a fin de ayudar a los propietarios de equipos a  
reciclar sus productos de TI. Se puede encontrar información sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos  
de Lenovo en el sitio web de Lenovo  
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment/recycling.  
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and Norway.  
This appliance is labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC concerning waste electrical  
and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling  
of used appliances as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various  
products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per  
this Directive.  
Remarque : Cette marque s’applique uniquement aux pays de l’Union Européenne et à la Norvège.  
L’etiquette du système respecte la Directive européenne 2002/96/EC en matière de Déchets des  
Equipements Electriques et Electroniques (DEEE), qui détermine les dispositions de retour et de recyclage  
applicables aux systèmes utilisés à travers l’Union européenne. Conformément à la directive, ladite  
étiquette précise que le produit sur lequel elle est apposée ne doit pas être jeté mais être récupéré en fin  
de vie.  
In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) is to be  
collected separately and to be reused, recycled, or recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEE  
marking per Annex IV of the WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as  
unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return,  
recycling, and recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of  
EEE on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE.  
For proper collection and treatment, contact your local Lenovo representative.  
Appendix. Notices 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Compliance with Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of  
Hazardous Substances  
Meets requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the Use of Certain  
Hazardous Substances In Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE).  
Türkiye EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygunluk Beyanı  
Bu Lenovo ürünü, T.C. Çevre ve Orman Bakanlığı'nın “Elektrik  
ve Elektronik Eşyalarda Bazı Zararlı Maddelerin Kullanımının  
Sınırlandırılmasına Dair Yönetmelik (EEE)” direktiflerine uygundur.  
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.  
Recycling statements for Japan  
224 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Battery return program  
This product may contain a lithium or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual or service manual  
for specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly. Recycling facilities  
may not be available in your area. For information on disposal or batteries outside the United States, go  
to http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment or contact your local waste disposal facility.  
For Taiwan: Please recycle batteries.  
For the European Union:  
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU).  
Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006/66/EC  
concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators. The Directive determines  
the framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout  
the European Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be  
thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.  
Les batteries ou emballages pour batteries sont étiquetés conformément aux directives européennes  
2006/66/EC, norme relative aux batteries et accumulateurs en usage et aux batteries et accumulateurs  
usés. Les directives déterminent la marche à suivre en vigueue dans l’Union Européenne pour le retour et  
le recyclage des batteries et accumulateurs usés. Cette étiquette est appliquée sur diverses batteries pour  
indiquer que la batterie ne doit pas être mise au rebut mais plutôt récupérée en fin de cycle de vie selon  
cette norme.  
In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to  
indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may  
also include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and  
Cd for cadmium). Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as  
unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return,  
recycling, and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer participation is important to minimize  
Appendix. Notices 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the  
potential presence of hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
For California:  
Perchlorate material - special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/  
perchlorate/.  
The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations Title 22, Division 4.5  
Chapter 33. Best Management Practices for Perchlorate Materials. This product/part may include a  
lithium manganese dioxide battery which contains a perchlorate substance.  
German Ordinance for Work gloss statement  
The product is not suitable for use with visual display work place devices according to clause 2 of the  
German Ordinance for Work with Visual Display Units.  
Das Produkt ist nicht für den Einsatz an Bildschirmarbeitsplätzen im Sinne § 2 der  
Bildschirmarbeitsverordnung geeignet.  
Electronic emission notices  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with  
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this  
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be  
required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission  
limits. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than  
recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.  
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio  
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.  
226 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement  
Notice to Customers  
This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect connection to  
public telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.  
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on  
the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo  
cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a  
non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-Lenovo option cards  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology  
Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class A equipment were  
derived for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference  
with licensed communication equipment.  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio  
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.  
Germany Class A compliance statement  
Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:  
Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit  
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (früher  
89/336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den  
EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.  
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu  
betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden.  
Lenovo übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt  
ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern  
ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden.  
Deutschland:  
Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmittein  
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln”  
EMVG (früher “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten”). Dies ist die Umsetzung  
der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (früher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.  
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von  
Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (früher Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
von Geräten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (früher 89/336/EWG), für Geräte der Klasse A.  
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen  
- CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo  
(Deutschland) GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart.  
Appendix. Notices 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:  
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A.  
Nach der EN 55022: “Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich  
Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene  
Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür aufzukommen.”  
Nach dem EMVG: “Geräte dürfen an Orten, für die sie nicht ausreichend entstört sind, nur mit  
besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesministers für Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes  
für Post und Telekommunikation betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn keine  
elektromagnetischen Störungen zu erwarten sind.” (Auszug aus dem EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs. 4). Dieses  
Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der entsprechenden  
Kostenverordnung (Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig.  
Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den Handbüchern  
angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.  
Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement  
Taiwan Class A warning statement  
ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄ  
ꢅꢆꢇꢈꢉꢊꢋꢌꢍꢎ，ꢏꢐꢑꢒꢓꢔꢂꢃꢕ，  
ꢖꢗꢘꢙꢚꢛꢜ !，"ꢅ#$%&，ꢂꢃꢄꢘ  
'()*+,-./012。  
228 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
People’s Republic of China Class A warning statement  
Korea Class A warning statement  
Appendix. Notices 229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
230 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
cover, removing 119  
CPU error LEDs 66  
creating  
RAID array 207  
CRUs, replacing  
error codes and messages  
diagnostic 70  
ABR, automatic boot failure  
recovery 102  
IMM 30  
messages, diagnostic 68  
POST 21  
acoustical noise emissions 12  
administrator password 202  
air deflector  
important note 147  
location 147  
ASM event log 20  
assertion event, system-event log 20  
automatic boot failure recovery  
(ABR) 102  
battery 151  
DIMMs 124  
hard disk drive 126  
memory 124  
error symptoms  
general 52  
hard disk drive 52  
hypervisor flash device 54  
intermittent 55  
keyboard, non-USB 56  
memory 57  
optical drive 164  
riser-card assembly 157  
system board 144  
customer replaceable units (CRUs) 179  
microprocessor 58  
monitor 59  
mouse, non-USB 56  
optical drive 51  
optional devices 61  
pointing device, non-USB 56  
power 62  
serial port 63  
software 64  
USB port 65  
B
D
backup firmware  
starting 213  
battery  
data collection 16  
deassertion event, system-event log 20  
diagnosing a problem 16  
diagnostic  
removing 151, 152  
replacing 151  
Battery failure LED 66  
bays 11  
error codes 70  
LEDs, error 65  
errors  
on-board programs, starting 69  
programs, overview 68  
test log, viewing 69  
text message format 69  
tools, overview 19  
diagnostics program 10  
DIMM LEDs 66  
DIMMs  
format, diagnostic code 69  
Ethernet  
bezel,  
installing 121  
removing 120  
controller  
troubleshooting 102  
Ethernet support 10  
event logs 19  
clearing 21  
expansion bays 11  
external, system board connectors 108  
blue screen capture features  
blue-screen capture feature  
overview 9, 218  
boot failure, three consecutive 102  
boot manager program  
9
installing 122  
removing 124  
using 205  
bypassing an unknown password 203  
display problems 59  
DMI/SMBIOS data  
updating 171  
F
drive cage  
fan  
C
replacing 136  
installing 150  
removing 149  
replacing 149  
fans  
checkout procedure 15, 16  
Class A electronic emission notice 226  
code updates 17  
drives 10  
DSA log 20  
DVD drive  
collecting data 16  
completing  
the options installation 173  
components  
installing 165  
problems 51  
removing 164  
replacing 164  
determine error 149  
size 12  
weight 12  
FCC Class A notice 226  
features, remote presence and  
major 117  
DVD drive cable  
configuration programs  
LSI Configuration Utility 199  
connectors  
for options on the system board 109  
on the rear of the server 106  
connectors, external system board 108  
connectors, internal system board 107  
contamination, particulate and  
gaseous 12  
installing 163  
removing 162  
blue-screen  
9
field replaceable units (FRUs) 179  
firmware, server, recovering 100  
firmware, server, updating 141  
firmware, updating 212  
forgotten password, bypassing 203  
formatting  
hard disk drive 207  
front view  
LED location 105  
front view of the server 105  
FRUs, replacing  
Dynamic System Analysis Preboot  
Diagnostics (DSA) program 10  
E
EasyStartup  
controller  
using 209  
Ethernet  
electrical input 12  
configuring 219  
removing the ServeRAID-BR10il  
SAS/SATA 159  
electronic emission Class A notice 226  
enclosure manager heartbeat  
LED 67  
enclosure manager heartbeat LED 67  
environment 12  
drive cage 136  
fan 149  
microprocessor 139  
operator information panel 134  
controllers  
Ethernet 219  
cover, installing 119  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2007, 2009.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
 
FRUs, replacing (continued)  
optical cable 162  
installing (continued)  
memory  
removing 124  
specifications 11  
memory module  
installing 122  
memory problems 57  
memory support 10  
menu choices  
riser-card assembly 158  
SAS backplane 157  
SAS/SATA backplane 154  
SAS/SATA backplate 154  
system board 145  
PCI-X riser-card power cable 168  
power supply 146  
SAS/SATA backplane 154  
the ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA  
controller 159  
the ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA  
controller 160  
virtual media key 167  
virtual media key 167  
installing the cover 119  
integrated baseboard management  
controller 114  
integrated functions 11  
integrated management module  
LED 67  
for the Setup Utility 200  
messages  
diagnostic 68  
messages, error  
POST 21  
G
gaseous contamination 12  
gloss statement (Germany) 226  
grease, thermal 143  
microprocessor  
installing 141  
overview  
9
problems 58  
integrated management module event  
log 20  
intermittent problems 55  
internal, system board connectors 107  
IP address  
removing 140  
replacing 139  
specifications 11  
monitor problems 59  
H
hard disk drive  
formatting 207  
hot-swap SATA 128  
installing 126, 127  
problems 52  
removing 126  
SAS 128  
obtaining for the IMM 218  
N
network operating system (NOS)  
installation  
without EasyStartup 212  
notes, important 222  
notices  
J
SCSI  
jumper  
See SAS  
UEFI boot recovery 100  
jumper, clear CMOS (password  
override) 203  
jumpers and switches  
on the system board 111  
simple-swap SATA 127  
heat output 12  
heat sink  
installing 141  
humidity 12  
hypervisor flash device  
installing 134  
problems 54  
removing 133  
electronic emission 226  
FCC, Class A 226  
O
K
obtaining  
key, virtual media  
9
the IP address for the IMM 218  
online service request 18  
operator information panel  
installing 135  
replacing 134  
operator information panel assembly  
removing 134  
optcal drive  
removing 164  
optical cable  
keyboard problems 56  
I
L
IBM Advanced Settings Utility program  
overview 216  
LED  
IMM  
integrated management module 67  
LED,  
error messages 30  
IMM event log 20  
IMM heartbeat  
Battery failure 66  
enclosure manager heartbeat 67  
IMM heartbeat 66, 67  
System-board error 66  
LEDs  
replacing 162  
optical drive  
LED 67  
IMM heartbeat LED 66  
IMM IP address  
installing 165  
problems 51  
replacing 164  
obtaining 218  
front 105  
on the system board 65, 112  
rear 175  
indicators 105  
installation, options  
completing 173  
optional device connectors  
on the system board 109  
optional device problems 61  
optional optical drive  
specifications 11  
LEDs,  
installing  
CPU error 66  
DIMM 66  
a DVD drive 165  
a heat sink 141  
an optical drive 165  
battery 152  
bezel 121  
DVD drive cable 163  
fan 150  
hard disk drive 126  
hypervisor flash device 134  
memory modules 122  
microprocessor 141  
operator-information panel 135  
PCI-X riser-card power cable 169  
power supply 148  
PCI slot error 67  
LEDs, system pulse 67  
local area network (LAN) 10  
logs  
system event message 29  
LSI Configuration program 206  
P
particulate contamination 12  
parts listing 177, 179, 183, 186, 190  
password  
clear CMOS jumper 203  
override 203  
power-on 203  
M
major components 117  
PCI card  
management, system  
9
PCI Express bus 130  
PCI-X bus 130  
232 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PCI card (continued)  
replacing 130  
PCI card, installation 132  
PCI expansion slots 11  
PCI riser-card assembly  
removing 157  
removing (continued)  
DVD drive 164  
server (continued)  
power features 113  
turning it off 113  
turning it on 113  
DVD drive cable 162  
fan 149  
hard disk drive 126  
hypervisor flash device 133  
microprocessor 140  
operator information panel  
assembly 134  
server , backup firmware  
starting 213  
server configuration  
updating 175  
replacing 157  
PCI slot error LEDs 67  
PCI-X riser-card power cable  
installing 169  
server firmware  
optical drive 164  
updating 141  
removing 168  
replacing 168  
POST  
error codes 21  
POST event log 19  
power  
specifications 12  
supply 11  
power cords 194  
power features  
PCI card 130  
server firmware, recovering 100  
server rear view 106  
server replaceable units 179  
server shutdown 113  
server, front view 105  
ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller  
installing 160  
service bulletins 18  
service request, online 18  
setting clear CMOS (password override)  
jumper 203  
PCI riser-card assembly 157  
PCI-X riser-card power cable 168  
power supply 147  
SAS backplane 156  
SAS/SATA backplane 154  
system board 144  
the ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA  
controller 159  
USB embedded hypervisor flash  
device 133  
of the server 113  
power problems 62, 102  
power supply  
virtual media key 167  
removing the cover 119  
replacement parts 179  
replacing  
Setup Utility  
menu choices 200  
starting 200  
using 200  
removing 147  
replacing 146  
power-on LED 113  
power-on password 202  
problem isolation tables 50  
problem, diagnosing 16  
problems  
a PCI riser-card assembly 157  
battery 151  
bezel 121  
drive cage 136  
DVD drive 164  
shutting down the server 113  
simple-swap Serial ATA hard disk  
drive 126, 127  
slot locations  
PCI card 109  
DVD drive 51  
fan 149  
PCI Express 109  
Ethernet controller 102  
hard disk drive 52  
hypervisor flash device 54  
IMM 30  
intermittent 55  
memory 57  
microprocessor 58  
monitor 59  
mouse 56  
optical drive 51  
optional devices 61  
pointing device 56  
power 62, 102  
serial port 63  
software 64  
microprocessor 139  
operator information panel 134  
optical cable 162  
optical drive 164  
PCI card 130  
PCI-X riser-card power cable 168  
power supply 146  
SAS/SATA backplane 154  
SAS/SATA backplate 154  
system board 144  
USB embedded hypervisor flash  
device 133  
PCI-X 110  
slots  
PCI expansion 11  
software problems 64  
standby 112  
standby mode 113  
start here  
troubleshooting procedures 15  
starting  
Setup Utility 200  
the backup firmware 213  
status LEDs 105  
virtual media key 167  
riser card  
switches and jumpers  
on the system board 111  
system board  
installing 158  
undetermined 103  
USB port 65  
removing 132  
replacing 158  
error LEDs 65  
installing 145  
video 65  
slots 109  
LEDs 112  
riser-card assembly  
installing 158  
removing 144  
replacing 144  
location 131  
switches and jumpers 111  
system board external connectors 108  
system board internal connectors 107  
system board optional devices  
connectors 109  
system event log 29  
system pulse LEDs 67  
System-board error LED 66  
system-event log 20  
R
RAID array  
creating 207  
S
RAID support 10  
rear view  
of the server 106  
recovering the server firmware 100  
redundant array of independent disks  
(RAID)  
SAS backplane  
installing 157  
removing 156  
SAS/SATA backplane  
installing 154  
removing 154  
replacing 154  
SAS/SATA backplate  
removing 154  
serial port problems 63  
server  
systems management  
9
controller 128, 130  
remote presence feature  
using 218  
removing  
9
T
battery 151  
bezel 120  
DIMM 124  
temperature 12  
test log, viewing 69  
thermal grease 143  
offerings  
9
Index 233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
three boot failure 102  
TOE 11  
tools, diagnostic 19  
trademarks 222  
troubleshooting procedures 18  
start here 15  
turning off the server 113  
integrated baseboard management  
controller 114  
turning on the server 113  
TÜV gloss statement 226  
U
UEFI 200  
boot recovery jumper 100  
undetermined problems 103  
undocumented problems 18  
United States electronic emission Class A  
notice 226  
United States FCC Class A notice 226  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) problems 65  
Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)  
updating 169  
unknown password, bypassing 203  
updating  
DMI/SMBIOS data 171  
server firmware 141  
the server configuration 175  
Universal Unique Identifier  
(UUID) 169  
updating firmware 212  
user password 203  
See power-on password  
using  
EasyStartup 209  
LSI Configuration program 206  
the boot manager program 205  
the remote presence feature 218  
Utility program  
IBM Advanced Settings 216  
Utility, Setup  
menu choices 200  
starting 200  
V
video controller, integrated  
specifications 12  
viewing event logs  
without restarting the server 20  
virtual media key  
installing 167  
removing 167  
replacing 167  
virtual media key, support  
9
W
Wake on LAN feature 113  
Web site  
Lenovo support 177, 212, 213, 220  
UEFI flash diskette 100  
what the server offers  
9
234 ThinkServer ThinkServer RS210, Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534: Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part Number: XXXXXX  
Printed in USA  
(1P) P/N: XXXXXX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Kyocera All in One Printer 9530DN User Manual
La Crosse Technology Weather Radio WD 9535 User Manual
Lasko Electric Heater 5572 User Manual
Life Fitness Work Light SMAB 001 User Manual
Magma Network Card 7 Slot Series User Manual
Marantz CD Player 541110510028M User Manual
Master Bilt Refrigerator BMG 27 User Manual
Maverick Ventures Thermometer ET 64 User Manual
Maytag Microwave Oven UMC5200AA User Manual
McCulloch Lawn Mower M4053CM User Manual